]> git.ipfire.org Git - thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git/blame - ld/ld.texinfo
Properly implement STT_COMMON
[thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
6f2750fe 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
49fa1e15 24@set H8300
0285c67d 25@set HPPA
0285c67d 26@set I960
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
36@set Renesas
37@set SPU
38@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 39@set WIN32
e0001a05 40@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
41@end ifset
42@c man end
43
9160ea82
AM
44@ifnottex
45@dircategory Software development
46@direntry
252b5132 47* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
48@end direntry
49@end ifnottex
252b5132 50
0e9517a9 51@copying
e49e529d
JM
52This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55@end ifset
56version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 57
6f2750fe 58Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
6f2750fe 95Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 96
0285c67d 97Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 98under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
99or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 102section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 103@c man end
252b5132 104
252b5132
RH
105@end titlepage
106@end iftex
4ecceb71 107@contents
252b5132
RH
108@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
84ec0e6d 110@ifnottex
252b5132 111@node Top
71ba23f6 112@top LD
e49e529d
JM
113This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116@end ifset
117version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 118
cf055d54 119This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
120Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 122
252b5132
RH
123@menu
124* Overview:: Overview
125* Invocation:: Invocation
126* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127@ifset GENERIC
128* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129@end ifset
130@ifclear GENERIC
131@ifset H8300
132* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
134@ifset Renesas
135* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
136@end ifset
137@ifset I960
138* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
140@ifset ARM
141* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
143@ifset M68HC11
144* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
146@ifset HPPA
147* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
149@ifset M68K
150* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151@end ifset
833794fc
MR
152@ifset MIPS
153* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
155@ifset POWERPC
156* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157@end ifset
158@ifset POWERPC64
159* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
161@ifset SPU
162* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
164@ifset TICOFF
165* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
167@ifset WIN32
168* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
170@ifset XTENSA
171* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172@end ifset
252b5132
RH
173@end ifclear
174@ifclear SingleFormat
175* BFD:: BFD
176@end ifclear
177@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 181* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 182* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 183@end menu
84ec0e6d 184@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
185
186@node Overview
187@chapter Overview
188
189@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 191
0879a67a 192@ifset man
0285c67d 193@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 194ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
195@c man end
196
197@c man begin SEEALSO
198ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200@file{ld}.
201@c man end
202@end ifset
203
204@c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
ff5dcc92 206@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 207their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 208compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 209
ff5dcc92 210@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
211a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
0285c67d
NC
214@ifset man
215@c For the man only
ece2d90e 216This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
217@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
219@end ifset
220
252b5132 221@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
222This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
224write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227@end ifclear
228
229Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 232@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
233(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
0285c67d
NC
235@c man end
236
252b5132
RH
237@node Invocation
238@chapter Invocation
239
0285c67d
NC
240@c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
ff5dcc92 242The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
243and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
0285c67d
NC
246@c man end
247
252b5132
RH
248@ifset UsesEnvVars
249@menu
250* Options:: Command Line Options
251* Environment:: Environment Variables
252@end menu
253
254@node Options
255@section Command Line Options
256@end ifset
257
258@cindex command line
259@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
260
261@c man begin OPTIONS
262
252b5132
RH
263The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 266For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
267object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270@smallexample
271ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272@end smallexample
273
ff5dcc92 274This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
275result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
ff5dcc92 279Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
280point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
285occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287noted in the descriptions below.
288
289@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
290Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
294
295Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299message @samp{No input files}.
300
36f63dca 301If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
302assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
307@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
312
313For options whose names are a single letter,
314option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316option that requires them.
317
318For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 319precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 320@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 321this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 322only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
323@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325output.
326
327Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332accepted.
252b5132 333
36f63dca
NC
334Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
336prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
338
339@smallexample
2509a395 340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
341@end smallexample
342
343This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
344silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351@smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
354
355Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356linker:
357
ff5dcc92 358@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 359@include at-file.texi
dff70155 360
2509a395
SL
361@kindex -a @var{keyword}
362@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
363This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
7ee314fa
AM
369@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 376it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 377This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 378interface.
7ee314fa 379
252b5132
RH
380@ifset I960
381@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
382@kindex -A @var{arch}
383@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
384@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
386In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
388@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 390archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
391family}, for details.
392
ff5dcc92 393Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
394other architecture families.
395@end ifset
396
397@ifclear SingleFormat
398@cindex binary input format
399@kindex -b @var{format}
400@kindex --format=@var{format}
401@cindex input format
402@cindex input format
403@item -b @var{input-format}
404@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
405@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 407@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 408that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 409configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 410to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
411default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415@xref{BFD}.
416
417You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419linking object files of different formats), by including
420@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 421particular format.
252b5132
RH
422
423The default format is taken from the environment variable
424@code{GNUTARGET}.
425@ifset UsesEnvVars
426@xref{Environment}.
427@end ifset
428You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
429@code{TARGET};
430@ifclear man
431see @ref{Format Commands}.
432@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
433@end ifclear
434
435@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437@cindex compatibility, MRI
438@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 440For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 441files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
442@ifclear man
443@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444@end ifclear
445@ifset man
446the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447@end ifset
448Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 449the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
450scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
452specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454@cindex common allocation
455@kindex -d
456@kindex -dc
457@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 458@item -d
252b5132
RH
459@itemx -dc
460@itemx -dp
461These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
7ee314fa
AM
467@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 476The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 477
252b5132
RH
478@cindex entry point, from command line
479@kindex -e @var{entry}
480@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 481@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
482@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
b58f81ae
DJ
491@kindex --exclude-libs
492@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 494exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
495@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500be treated as hidden.
501
e1c37eb5
DK
502@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513regardless of this option.
514
252b5132
RH
515@cindex dynamic symbol table
516@kindex -E
517@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 518@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
519@item -E
520@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
521@itemx --no-export-dynamic
522When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
531
532If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535linking the program itself.
536
55255dae 537You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 538be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 539See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 540
8b747e1a
DK
541Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
36f63dca 545@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
546@cindex big-endian objects
547@cindex endianness
548@kindex -EB
549@item -EB
550Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552@cindex little-endian objects
553@kindex -EL
554@item -EL
555Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 556@end ifclear
252b5132 557
2509a395
SL
558@kindex -f @var{name}
559@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560@item -f @var{name}
561@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
562When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575machine specific performance.
576
577This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
2509a395
SL
580@kindex -F @var{name}
581@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 582@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 583@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
584When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595@var{name}.
596
ff5dcc92 597Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 598toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
599object files.
600@ifclear SingleFormat
601The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 602@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 603@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
604environment variable.
605@end ifclear
606The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 608
3dbf70a2 609@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
610@kindex -fini=@var{name}
611@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
612When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615the function to call.
616
252b5132
RH
617@kindex -g
618@item -g
619Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
2509a395
SL
621@kindex -G @var{value}
622@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 623@cindex object size
2509a395 624@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
625@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 628MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
629sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 632@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 633@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 634@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
635@itemx -soname=@var{name}
636When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642@kindex -i
643@cindex incremental link
644@item -i
645Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
3dbf70a2 647@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
648@kindex -init=@var{name}
649@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
650When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653function to call.
654
252b5132 655@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 656@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 657@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 658@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
659@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 663will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 664will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 665
ff5dcc92 666On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
667files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
674
675The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
ff5dcc92 682See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
683archives multiple times.
684
685You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687@ifset GENERIC
688This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 689if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
690behaviour of the AIX linker.
691@end ifset
692
693@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 694@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 695@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 696@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 697@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
698Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
700option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 703@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
704order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706option is specified.
252b5132 707
9c8ebd6a 708If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
b3b9c41d
HPN
709by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the @samp{--sysroot} option, or
710specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 711
252b5132
RH
712@ifset UsesEnvVars
713The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 714@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
715some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
716@end ifset
717
718The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
719@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
720at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
721
722@cindex emulation
723@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 724@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
725Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
726emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
727
728If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
729@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
730
731Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
732configured.
733
734@cindex link map
735@kindex -M
736@kindex --print-map
737@item -M
738@itemx --print-map
739Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
740information about the link, including the following:
741
742@itemize @bullet
743@item
3b83e13a 744Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
745@item
746How common symbols are allocated.
747@item
748All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
749which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
750@item
751The values assigned to symbols.
752
753Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
754involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
755have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
756linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
757of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
758the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
759linker script containing:
760
761@smallexample
762 foo = 1
763 foo = foo * 4
764 foo = foo + 8
765@end smallexample
766
767will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
768option is used:
769
770@smallexample
771 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
773 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
774@end smallexample
775
776See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
777scripts.
252b5132
RH
778@end itemize
779
780@kindex -n
781@cindex read-only text
782@cindex NMAGIC
783@kindex --nmagic
784@item -n
785@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
786Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
787libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
788mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
789
790@kindex -N
791@kindex --omagic
792@cindex read/write from cmd line
793@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 794@item -N
252b5132
RH
795@itemx --omagic
796Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
797not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
798libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
799mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
800is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
801specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
802
803@kindex --no-omagic
804@cindex OMAGIC
805@item --no-omagic
806This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
807sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
808be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
809shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
810
811@kindex -o @var{output}
812@kindex --output=@var{output}
813@cindex naming the output file
814@item -o @var{output}
815@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 816Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
817option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
818script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
819
820@kindex -O @var{level}
821@cindex generating optimized output
822@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 823If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 824the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
825should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
826option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
827the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
828no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
829of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 830
26278bb8
UD
831@kindex --push-state
832@cindex push state governing input file handling
833@item --push-state
834The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
835flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
836restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
837
838The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
839@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
840@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
841@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
842@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
843@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
844
845One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
846used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
847listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
848something as follows:
849
850@smallexample
851-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
852@end smallexample
853
854@kindex --pop-state
855@cindex pop state governing input file handling
856Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
857flags governing input file handling.
858
a712da20
NC
859@kindex -q
860@kindex --emit-relocs
861@cindex retain relocations in final executable
862@item -q
863@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 864Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
865Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
866order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
867in larger executables.
868
dbab7a7b
NC
869This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
870
4f471f39
RS
871@kindex --force-dynamic
872@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
873@item --force-dynamic
874Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
875to VxWorks targets.
876
252b5132
RH
877@cindex partial link
878@cindex relocatable output
879@kindex -r
1049f94e 880@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 881@item -r
1049f94e 882@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 883Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 884turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
885linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
886magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
887@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 888@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
889If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
890linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
891constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
892
62bf86b4
HPN
893When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
894partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
895relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
896example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
897with input files in other formats at all.
898
252b5132
RH
899This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
900
901@kindex -R @var{file}
902@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
903@cindex symbol-only input
904@item -R @var{filename}
905@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
906Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
907relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
908to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
909programs. You may use this option more than once.
910
ff5dcc92 911For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 912followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 913the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
914
915@kindex -s
916@kindex --strip-all
917@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 918@item -s
252b5132
RH
919@itemx --strip-all
920Omit all symbol information from the output file.
921
922@kindex -S
923@kindex --strip-debug
924@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 925@item -S
252b5132
RH
926@itemx --strip-debug
927Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
928
929@kindex -t
930@kindex --trace
931@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 932@item -t
252b5132 933@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 934Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
935
936@kindex -T @var{script}
937@kindex --script=@var{script}
938@cindex script files
939@item -T @var{scriptfile}
940@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
941Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 942@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 943@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
944output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
945the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
946specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
947options accumulate.
252b5132 948
14be8564
L
949@kindex -dT @var{script}
950@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
951@cindex script files
952@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
953@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
954Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
955
956This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
957processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
958command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
959@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
960behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
961command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
962the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
963@samp{gcc}).
964
252b5132
RH
965@kindex -u @var{symbol}
966@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
967@cindex undefined symbol
968@item -u @var{symbol}
969@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
970Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
971symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
972modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
973different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
974option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
975
0a618243
AB
976If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
977into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
978undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
979instead.
980
981@kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
982@cindex symbols, require defined
983@cindex defined symbol
984@item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
985Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
986is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
987is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
988and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
989@code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
990can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
991
252b5132
RH
992@kindex -Ur
993@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 994@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
995For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
996@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 997turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
998@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
999It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1000with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1001be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1002@samp{-r} for the others.
1003
c005eb9e
AB
1004@kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1005@cindex orphan sections
1006@cindex sections, orphan
1007@item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1008Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1009specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1010
1011@var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1012
1013@table @code
1014@item place
1015Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1016the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
1017@samp{--unique} also effects how sections are placed.
1018
1019@item discard
1020All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1021@samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1022
1023@item warn
1024The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1025issue a warning.
1026
1027@item error
1028The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1029@end table
1030
1031The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1032
577a0623
AM
1033@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1034@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1035Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1036@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1037missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1038specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1039multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1040input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1041in a linker script.
a854a4a7 1042
252b5132
RH
1043@kindex -v
1044@kindex -V
1045@kindex --version
1046@cindex version
1047@item -v
1048@itemx --version
1049@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1050Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1051lists the supported emulations.
1052
1053@kindex -x
1054@kindex --discard-all
1055@cindex deleting local symbols
1056@item -x
1057@itemx --discard-all
1058Delete all local symbols.
1059
1060@kindex -X
1061@kindex --discard-locals
1062@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1063@item -X
252b5132 1064@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1065Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1066system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1067or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1068
1069@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1070@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1071@cindex symbol tracing
1072@item -y @var{symbol}
1073@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1074Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1075option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1076to prepend an underscore.
1077
1078This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1079don't know where the reference is coming from.
1080
1081@kindex -Y @var{path}
1082@item -Y @var{path}
1083Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1084for Solaris compatibility.
1085
1086@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1087@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1088The recognized keywords are:
1089@table @samp
1090
1091@item combreloc
1092Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1093lookup caching possible.
1094
b8871f35
L
1095@item common
1096Generate common symbols with the STT_COMMON type druing a relocatable
1097link.
1098
cd6d6c15 1099@item defs
560e09e9 1100Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1101shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1102
6aa29e7b
JJ
1103@item execstack
1104Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1105
b039ef04
L
1106@item global
1107This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1108the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1109of subsequently loaded libraries.
1110
cd6d6c15
NC
1111@item initfirst
1112This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1113It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1114before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1115the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1116the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1117objects.
1118
1119@item interpose
1120Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1121but the primary executable.
1122
5fa222e4
AM
1123@item lazy
1124When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1125dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1126the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1127Lazy binding is the default.
1128
cd6d6c15
NC
1129@item loadfltr
1130Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1131runtime.
1132
1133@item muldefs
1134Allows multiple definitions.
1135
1136@item nocombreloc
1137Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1138
b8871f35
L
1139@item nocommon
1140Generate common symbols with the STT_OBJECT type druing a relocatable
1141link.
1142
cd6d6c15 1143@item nocopyreloc
daf220f0
AM
1144Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1145defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
cd6d6c15
NC
1146
1147@item nodefaultlib
1148Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1149ignore any default library search paths.
1150
1151@item nodelete
1152Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1153
1154@item nodlopen
1155Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1156
1157@item nodump
1158Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1159
6aa29e7b
JJ
1160@item noexecstack
1161Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1162
8dfef1bd
L
1163@item text
1164Treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1165
1166@item notext
1167Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1168
1169@item textoff
1170Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1171
6aa29e7b
JJ
1172@item norelro
1173Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1174
cd6d6c15
NC
1175@item now
1176When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1177dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1178when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1179deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1180first called.
1181
1182@item origin
1183Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1184
6aa29e7b
JJ
1185@item relro
1186Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1187
24718e3b
L
1188@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1189Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1190
1191@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1192Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1193
04c3a755
NS
1194@item stack-size=@var{value}
1195Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1196Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1197@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1198
d258b828
IZ
1199@item bndplt
1200Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1201
889c2a67
L
1202@item noextern-protected-data
1203Don't treat protected data symbol as external when building shared
1204library. This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used
1205to workaround incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1206generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
4dba69b9 1207module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
889c2a67
L
1208i386 and x86-64.
1209
aec6b87e
L
1210@item nodynamic-undefined-weak
1211Don't treat undefined weak symbols as dynamic when building executable.
1212This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used to avoid
1213dynamic relocations against undefined weak symbols in executable.
1214Supported for i386 and x86-64.
1215
caa65211
L
1216@item call-nop=prefix-addr
1217@itemx call-nop=prefix-nop
1218@itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1219@itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1220@itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1221Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1222to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1223@option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1224@option{call-nop=prefix-nop} generates @code{0x90 call foo}.
1225@option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1226@option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1227@option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1228Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1229
cd6d6c15
NC
1230@end table
1231
ece2d90e 1232Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1233
1234@kindex -(
1235@cindex groups of archives
1236@item -( @var{archives} -)
1237@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1238The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1239either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1240
1241The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1242references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1243the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1244archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1245object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1246would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1247they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1248resolved.
1249
1250Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1251it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1252more archives.
1253
69da35b5
NC
1254@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1255@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1256@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1257@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1258Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1259recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1260and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1261the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1262behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1263so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1264restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1265
4a43e768
AM
1266@kindex --as-needed
1267@kindex --no-as-needed
1268@item --as-needed
1269@itemx --no-as-needed
1270This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1271on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1272the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1273on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1274needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1275emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1276non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1277the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1278non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1279Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1280the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1281needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1282from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1283
e56f61be
L
1284@kindex --add-needed
1285@kindex --no-add-needed
1286@item --add-needed
1287@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1288These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1289their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1290options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1291and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1292
252b5132
RH
1293@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1294@item -assert @var{keyword}
1295This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1296
1297@kindex -Bdynamic
1298@kindex -dy
1299@kindex -call_shared
1300@item -Bdynamic
1301@itemx -dy
1302@itemx -call_shared
1303Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1304for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1305default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1306for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1307multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1308@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1309
a1ab1d2a
UD
1310@kindex -Bgroup
1311@item -Bgroup
1312Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1313section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1314object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1315@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1316only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1317
252b5132
RH
1318@kindex -Bstatic
1319@kindex -dn
1320@kindex -non_shared
1321@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1322@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1323@itemx -dn
1324@itemx -non_shared
1325@itemx -static
1326Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1327platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1328variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1329may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1330library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1331option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1332option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1333shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1334references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1335libraries.
252b5132
RH
1336
1337@kindex -Bsymbolic
1338@item -Bsymbolic
1339When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1340definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1341for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
e20365c5
L
1342within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1343@option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1344executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1345the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1346support shared libraries and position independent executables.
252b5132 1347
40b36307
L
1348@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1349@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1350When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1351symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
e20365c5
L
1352This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1353when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1354to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
40b36307 1355This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
e20365c5 1356libraries and position independent executables.
40b36307 1357
55255dae
L
1358@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1359@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1360Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1361typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1362global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1363within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1364to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1365in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1366which support shared libraries.
1367
1368The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1369scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1370
40b36307
L
1371@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1372@item --dynamic-list-data
1373Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1374
1375@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1376@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1377Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1378is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1379
0b8a70d9
L
1380@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1381@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1382Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1383
252b5132
RH
1384@kindex --check-sections
1385@kindex --no-check-sections
1386@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1387@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1388Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1389been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1390perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1391suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1392allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1393restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1394Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1395force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1396option.
252b5132 1397
ddbb8a31
NC
1398@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1399@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1400@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1401@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1402This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1403by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1404command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1405output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1406input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1407specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1408follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1409behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1410
1411This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1412libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1413mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1414their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1415required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1416the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1417dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1418symbols.
1419
252b5132
RH
1420@cindex cross reference table
1421@kindex --cref
1422@item --cref
1423Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1424generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1425Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1426
1427The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1428easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1429sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1430symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1431definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1432where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1433symbol are listed.
252b5132 1434
4818e05f
AM
1435@cindex common allocation
1436@kindex --no-define-common
1437@item --no-define-common
1438This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1439The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1440@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1441
1442The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1443the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1444of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1445forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1446Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1447from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1448This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1449and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1450duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1451paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1452
252b5132 1453@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1454@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1455@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1456Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1457address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1458times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1459limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1460context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1461symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1462constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
66bc8739
AM
1463using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1464@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1465equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
252b5132
RH
1466
1467@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1468@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1469@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1470@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1471@itemx --no-demangle
1472These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1473and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1474present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1475underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1476mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1477different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1478to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1479demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1480is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1481
1482@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1483@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1484@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1485@item -I@var{file}
1486@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1487Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1488generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1489linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1490doing.
1491
9b8b325a
RF
1492@kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1493@item --no-dynamic-linker
1494When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1495linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1496executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1497entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1498
7ce691ae 1499@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1500@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1501@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1502@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1503Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1504with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1505
252b5132
RH
1506@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1507@item --force-exe-suffix
1508Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1509
1510If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1511@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1512the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1513option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1514Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1515it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1516
1517@kindex --gc-sections
1518@kindex --no-gc-sections
1519@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1520@item --gc-sections
1521@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1522Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1523targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761 1524performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
0f088b2a
KT
1525@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1526collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1527implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
252b5132 1528
d5465ba2
AM
1529@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1530examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1531symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1532command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1533referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1534libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1535referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1536the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1537relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1538
ac69cbc6 1539This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1540@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1541specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1542a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1543
c17d87de
NC
1544@kindex --print-gc-sections
1545@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1546@cindex garbage collection
1547@item --print-gc-sections
1548@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1549List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1550printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1551collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1552default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1553be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1554line.
1555
30824704
RM
1556@kindex --print-output-format
1557@cindex output format
1558@item --print-output-format
1559Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1560other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1561in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1562
3604cb1f
TG
1563@kindex --print-memory-usage
1564@cindex memory usage
1565@item --print-memory-usage
1566Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1567the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1568quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1569headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1570parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1571
1572@smallexample
1573Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1574 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1575 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1576@end smallexample
1577
252b5132
RH
1578@cindex help
1579@cindex usage
1580@kindex --help
1581@item --help
1582Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1583
ea20a7da
CC
1584@kindex --target-help
1585@item --target-help
1586Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1587
2509a395
SL
1588@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1589@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1590Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1591@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1592
1593@cindex memory usage
1594@kindex --no-keep-memory
1595@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1596@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1597symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1598instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1599necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1600while linking a large executable.
1601
1602@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1603@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1604@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1605@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1606Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1607is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1608The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1609behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1610libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1611
aa713662
L
1612@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1613@kindex -z muldefs
1614@item --allow-multiple-definition
1615@itemx -z muldefs
1616Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1617report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1618first definition will be used.
1619
b79e8c78 1620@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1621@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1622@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1623@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1624Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1625This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1626determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1627shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1628how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1629
903249d7
NC
1630The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1631referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1632an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1633a shared library.
1634
1635The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1636libraries specified at link time are that:
1637
1638@itemize @bullet
1639@item
1640A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1641that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1642resolvable at load time.
1643@item
1644There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1645symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1646
1647The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1648select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1649architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1650appropriate memset function.
1651@end itemize
b79e8c78 1652
31941635
L
1653@kindex --no-undefined-version
1654@item --no-undefined-version
1655Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1656it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1657will be issued instead.
1658
3e3b46e5
PB
1659@kindex --default-symver
1660@item --default-symver
1661Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1662exported symbols.
1663
1664@kindex --default-imported-symver
1665@item --default-imported-symver
1666Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1667imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1668
252b5132
RH
1669@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1670@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1671Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1672files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1673been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1674This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1675errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1676have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1677inappropriate.
1678
fe7929ce
AM
1679@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1680@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1681Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1682library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1683
252b5132
RH
1684@kindex --no-whole-archive
1685@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1686Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1687archive files.
1688
1689@cindex output file after errors
1690@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1691@item --noinhibit-exec
1692Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1693Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1694errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1695when it issues any error whatsoever.
1696
0a9c1c8e
CD
1697@kindex -nostdlib
1698@item -nostdlib
1699Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1700command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1701(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1702
252b5132 1703@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1704@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1705@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1706@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1707file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1708@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1709object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1710object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1711should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1712usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1713name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1714list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1715command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1716this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1717@end ifclear
1718
36af4a4e
JJ
1719@kindex -pie
1720@kindex --pic-executable
1721@item -pie
1722@itemx --pic-executable
1723@cindex position independent executables
1724Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1725ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1726libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1727address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1728normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1729defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1730
252b5132
RH
1731@kindex -qmagic
1732@item -qmagic
1733This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1734
1735@kindex -Qy
1736@item -Qy
1737This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1738
1739@kindex --relax
1740@cindex synthesizing linker
1741@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1742@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1743@item --relax
28d5f677 1744@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1745An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1746@ifset GENERIC
1747This option is only supported on a few targets.
1748@end ifset
1749@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1750@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1751@end ifset
1752@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1753@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1754@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1755@ifset XTENSA
1756@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1757@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1758@ifset M68HC11
1759@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1760@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1761@ifset NIOSII
1762@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1763@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1764@ifset POWERPC
1765@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1766@end ifset
252b5132 1767
28d5f677
NC
1768On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1769global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1770addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1771synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1772instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1773
1774On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1775debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1776@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1777This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1778family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1779@end ifset
1780
1781@ifset GENERIC
1782On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1783but ignored.
1784@end ifset
1785
28d5f677
NC
1786On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1787@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1788
252b5132
RH
1789@cindex retaining specified symbols
1790@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1791@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1792@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1793@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1794Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1795discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1796symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1797@ifset GENERIC
1798(such as VxWorks)
1799@end ifset
1800where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1801run-time memory.
1802
1803@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1804or symbols needed for relocations.
1805
1806You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1807line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1808
1809@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1810@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1811@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1812@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1813Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1814linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1815arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1816them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1817also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1818objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1819@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1820ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1821@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1822
ff5dcc92 1823The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
d8506323 1824SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1825@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1826runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1827options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1828gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1829file systems.
252b5132 1830
ff5dcc92 1831For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1832followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1833the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1834@end ifset
1835
1836@ifset GENERIC
1837@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1838@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1839@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1840When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1841happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1842of the input files.
1843
1844When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1845non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1846shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1847explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1848specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1849@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1850either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1851appearing multiple times.
1852
28c309a2
NC
1853This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1854that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1855is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1856runtime linker would do.
1857
252b5132 1858The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1859libraries:
252b5132
RH
1860@enumerate
1861@item
ff5dcc92 1862Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1863@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1864Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1865between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1866specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1867used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1868at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1869by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1870the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1871@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1872On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1873@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1874environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1875@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1876On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1877directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1878@item
a1b8d843 1879For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 1880variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1881@item
ec4eb78a
L
1882For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1883@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1884libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1885@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1886@item
252b5132
RH
1887The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1888@item
1889For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1890exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1891@end enumerate
1892
1893If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1894warning and continue with the link.
1895@end ifset
1896
1897@kindex -shared
1898@kindex -Bshareable
1899@item -shared
1900@itemx -Bshareable
1901@cindex shared libraries
1902Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1903and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1904shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1905undefined symbols in the link.
1906
252b5132 1907@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1908@item --sort-common
1909@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1910@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1911This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1912ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1913sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1914eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1915between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1916specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1917
2509a395
SL
1918@kindex --sort-section=name
1919@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1920This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1921patterns in the linker script.
1922
2509a395
SL
1923@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1924@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1925This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1926patterns in the linker script.
1927
252b5132 1928@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1929@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1930Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1931each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1932size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1933
1934@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1935@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1936Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1937output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1938This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1939certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1940cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1941that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1942support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1943input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1944more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1945many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1946
1947@kindex --stats
1948@item --stats
1949Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1950as execution time and memory usage.
1951
2509a395 1952@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1953@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1954Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1955configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1956that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1957
252b5132
RH
1958@kindex --traditional-format
1959@cindex traditional format
1960@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1961For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1962the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1963use the traditional format instead.
1964
1965@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1966For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1967symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1968full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1969@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1970trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1971combine duplicate entries.
1972
2509a395
SL
1973@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1974@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1975Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1976address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1977times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1978line.
1979@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1980for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1981@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1982should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1983sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1984
2509a395
SL
1985@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1986@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1987@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1988@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1989@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1990@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1991@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1992Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1993@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1994
2509a395
SL
1995@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1996@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 1997@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
1998When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
1999byte of the text segment.
258795f5 2000
9d5777a3
RM
2001@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2002@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2003@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2004When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2005the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2006text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2007
0d705e9f
AM
2008@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2009@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2010@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2011When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2012model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2013
560e09e9
NC
2014@kindex --unresolved-symbols
2015@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2016Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2017values for @samp{method}:
2018
2019@table @samp
2020@item ignore-all
da8bce14 2021Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
2022
2023@item report-all
da8bce14 2024Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
2025
2026@item ignore-in-object-files
2027Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2028ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2029
2030@item ignore-in-shared-libs
2031Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2032ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2033when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2034libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2035command line.
2036@end table
2037
2038The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2039by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2040
2041Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2042unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2043can change this to a warning.
2044
1715a13c
L
2045@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2046@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 2047@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 2048@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 2049Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 2050supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
2051the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2052argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
2053
2054@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2055@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 2056@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
2057Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2058used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 2059about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
2060is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2061see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2062use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2063symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2064@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 2065
7ce691ae 2066@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
2067@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2068@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2069@item --warn-common
2070Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 2071a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
2072but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2073you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 2074Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
2075warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2076
2077There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2078
2079@table @samp
2080@item int i = 1;
2081A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2082file.
2083
2084@item extern int i;
2085An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2086There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2087variable somewhere.
2088
2089@item int i;
2090A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2091variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2092The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2093single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2094size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2095a definition of the same variable.
2096@end table
2097
2098The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2099Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2100just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2101encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2102a common symbol.
2103
2104@enumerate
2105@item
2106Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2107definition for the symbol.
2108@smallexample
2109@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2110 overridden by definition
2111@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2112@end smallexample
2113
2114@item
2115Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2116the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2117except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2118@smallexample
2119@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2120 overriding common
2121@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2122@end smallexample
2123
2124@item
2125Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2126@smallexample
2127@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2128 of `@var{symbol}'
2129@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2130@end smallexample
2131
2132@item
2133Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2134@smallexample
2135@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2136 overridden by larger common
2137@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2138@end smallexample
2139
2140@item
2141Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2142the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2143encountered in a different order.
2144@smallexample
2145@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2146 overriding smaller common
2147@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2148@end smallexample
2149@end enumerate
2150
2151@kindex --warn-constructors
2152@item --warn-constructors
2153Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2154object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2155detect the use of global constructors.
2156
2157@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2158@item --warn-multiple-gp
2159Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2160This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2161Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2162section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2163of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2164base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2165base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2166bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2167large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2168values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2169option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2170
2171@kindex --warn-once
2172@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2173@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2174@item --warn-once
2175Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2176which refers to it.
2177
2178@kindex --warn-section-align
2179@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2180@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2181@item --warn-section-align
2182Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2183alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2184The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2185is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2186the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2187
8fdd7217
NC
2188@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2189@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2190Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2191
a0c402a5
L
2192@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2193@item --warn-alternate-em
2194Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2195
560e09e9
NC
2196@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2197@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2198If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2199@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2200This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2201
2202@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2203@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2204This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2205it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2206
252b5132
RH
2207@kindex --whole-archive
2208@cindex including an entire archive
2209@item --whole-archive
2210For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2211@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2212in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2213files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2214library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2215library. This option may be used more than once.
2216
7ec229ce 2217Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2218about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2219Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2220list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2221your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2222
2509a395
SL
2223@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2224@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2225Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2226@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2227undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2228@var{symbol}.
2229
2230This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2231wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2232wishes to call the system function, it should call
2233@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2234
2235Here is a trivial example:
2236
2237@smallexample
2238void *
cc2f008e 2239__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2240@{
cc2f008e 2241 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2242 return __real_malloc (c);
2243@}
2244@end smallexample
2245
ff5dcc92 2246If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2247all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2248instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2249call the real @code{malloc} function.
2250
2251You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2252links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2253you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2254file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2255call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2256
6aa29e7b
JJ
2257@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2258@item --eh-frame-hdr
2259Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2260@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2261
e41b3a13
JJ
2262@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2263@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2264Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2265generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2266if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2267
6c1439be
L
2268@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2269@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2270@item --enable-new-dtags
2271@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2272This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2273systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2274@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2275and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2276If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2277created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2278those options are only available for ELF systems.
2279
2d643429 2280@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2281@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2282Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2283close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2284time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2285increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2286value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2287
fdc90cb4
JJ
2288@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2289@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2290Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2291@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2292new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2293the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2294hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2295
0ce398f1
L
2296@kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2297@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2298@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2299@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2300@item --compress-debug-sections=none
2301@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2302@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2303@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2304On ELF platforms , these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2305compressed using zlib. @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't
19a7fe52
L
2306compress DWARF debug sections.
2307@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses DWARF debug
0ce398f1 2308sections and rename debug section names to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
19a7fe52
L
2309instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib}
2310and @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2311compress DWARF debug sections with SHF_COMPRESSED from the ELF ABI.
6c3bc0f8
NC
2312The default behaviour varies depending upon the target involved and
2313the configure options used to build the toolchain. The default can be
2314determined by examing the output from the linker's @option{--help} option.
0ce398f1 2315
35835446
JR
2316@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2317@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2318This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2319linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2320for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2321about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2322
4f9c04f7 2323Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 23241021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2325run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2326has been used.
2327
2328The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2329enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2330
c0065db7
RM
2331@kindex --build-id
2332@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2333@item --build-id
2334@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c 2335Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
6033bf41 2336or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
61e2488c
JT
2337unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2338@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2339@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2340@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2341the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2342string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2343@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2344is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2345
2346The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2347that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2348unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2349to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2350file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2351string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2352
2353Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2354@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2355@end table
2356
0285c67d
NC
2357@c man end
2358
36f63dca 2359@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2360
0285c67d
NC
2361@c man begin OPTIONS
2362
ff5dcc92 2363The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2364the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2365normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2366use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2367@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2368like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2369symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2370object file).
2371
2372In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2373support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2374PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2375values by either a space or an equals sign.
2376
ff5dcc92 2377@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2378
2379@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2380@item --add-stdcall-alias
2381If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2382as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2383[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2384
2385@kindex --base-file
2386@item --base-file @var{file}
2387Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2388addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2389@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2390[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2391
2392@kindex --dll
2393@item --dll
2394Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2395@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2396file.
bb10df36 2397[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2398
88183869
DK
2399@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2400@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2401@item --enable-long-section-names
2402@itemx --disable-long-section-names
56e6cf80 2403The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
88183869 2404the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
56e6cf80
NC
2405for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2406fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
88183869
DK
2407to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2408allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2409disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2410generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2411as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2412with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2413GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2414information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2415option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2416section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2417when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2418image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2419[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2420
252b5132
RH
2421@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2422@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2423@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2424@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2425If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2426do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2427only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2428resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2429undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2430@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2431to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2432warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2433import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2434to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2435feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2436@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2437mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2438[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2439
522f09cd
KT
2440@kindex --leading-underscore
2441@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2442@item --leading-underscore
2443@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2444For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2445in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2446disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2447
252b5132
RH
2448@cindex DLLs, creating
2449@kindex --export-all-symbols
2450@item --export-all-symbols
2451If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2452be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2453otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2454explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2455attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2456option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2457@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2458@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2459exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2460re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2461such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2462@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2463@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2464Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2465not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2466extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2467(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2468These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2469@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2470@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2471@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2472@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2473[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2474
2475@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2476@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2477Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2478exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2479[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2480
2927aaca
NC
2481@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2482@item --exclude-all-symbols
2483Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2484[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2485
252b5132
RH
2486@kindex --file-alignment
2487@item --file-alignment
2488Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2489file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2490512.
bb10df36 2491[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2492
2493@cindex heap size
2494@kindex --heap
2495@item --heap @var{reserve}
2496@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2497Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2498to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2499committed.
bb10df36 2500[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2501
2502@cindex image base
2503@kindex --image-base
2504@item --image-base @var{value}
2505Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2506the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2507is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2508your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2509other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2510for dlls.
bb10df36 2511[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2512
2513@kindex --kill-at
2514@item --kill-at
2515If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2516symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2517[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2518
26d2d8a2
BF
2519@kindex --large-address-aware
2520@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2521If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2522header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2523greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2524or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2525section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2526[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2527
f69a2f97
NC
2528@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2529@item --disable-large-address-aware
2530Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2531This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2532driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2533addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2534[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2535
252b5132
RH
2536@kindex --major-image-version
2537@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2538Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2539[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2540
2541@kindex --major-os-version
2542@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2543Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2544[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2545
2546@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2547@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2548Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2549[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2550
2551@kindex --minor-image-version
2552@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2553Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2554[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2555
2556@kindex --minor-os-version
2557@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2558Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2559[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2560
2561@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2562@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2563Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2564[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2565
2566@cindex DEF files, creating
2567@cindex DLLs, creating
2568@kindex --output-def
2569@item --output-def @var{file}
2570The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2571file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2572(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2573library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2574automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2575[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2576
b044cda1
CW
2577@cindex DLLs, creating
2578@kindex --out-implib
2579@item --out-implib @var{file}
2580The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2581import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2582import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2583may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2584makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2585creation step.
bb10df36 2586[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2587
2588@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2589@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2590@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2591Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2592@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2593By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2594for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2595execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2596[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2597
2598@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2599@item --disable-auto-image-base
2600Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2601user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2602default.
bb10df36 2603[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2604
2605@cindex DLLs, linking to
2606@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2607@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2608When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2609search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2610@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2611between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2612uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2613@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2614[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2615
2616@kindex --enable-auto-import
2617@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2618Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2619DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2620building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2621'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2622to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2623specification published by Microsoft.
2624
e2a83dd0
NC
2625Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2626data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2627placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2628around a problem with consts that is described here:
2629http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2630
4d8907ac
DS
2631Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2632see this message:
0d888aac 2633
ece2d90e 2634"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2635documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2636
ece2d90e
NC
2637This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2638ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2639allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2640fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2641constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2642multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2643this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2644of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2645the warning, and exit.
2646
2647There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2648data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2649
2fa9fc65
NC
2650One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2651of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2652this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2653
c0065db7
RM
2654A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2655that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2656there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2657a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2658
2659@example
2660extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2661extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2662 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2663@end example
2664
2665or
2666
2667@example
2668extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2669extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2670 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2671@end example
2672
c0065db7 2673For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2674is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2675
2676@example
2677extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2678extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2679 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2680@end example
2681
c406afaf
NC
2682or
2683
2684@example
2685extern long long extern_ll;
2686extern_ll -->
2687 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2688@end example
2689
2fa9fc65 2690A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2691'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2692@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2693requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2694building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2695merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2696between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2697constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2698
2699Original:
2700@example
2701--foo.h
2702extern int arr[];
2703--foo.c
2704#include "foo.h"
2705void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2706 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2707@}
2708@end example
2709
2710Solution 1:
2711@example
2712--foo.h
2713extern int arr[];
2714--foo.c
2715#include "foo.h"
2716void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2717 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2718 volatile int *parr = arr;
2719 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2720@}
2721@end example
2722
2723Solution 2:
2724@example
2725--foo.h
2726/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2727#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2728 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2729#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2730#else
2731#define FOO_IMPORT
2732#endif
2733extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2734--foo.c
2735#include "foo.h"
2736void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2737 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2738@}
2739@end example
2740
c0065db7 2741A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2742library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2743for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2744functions).
bb10df36 2745[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2746
2747@kindex --disable-auto-import
2748@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2749Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2750@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2751[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2752
2fa9fc65
NC
2753@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2754@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2755If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2756that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2757a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2758environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2759[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2760
2761@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2762@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2763Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
676ee43b 2764DLLs.
bb10df36 2765[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2766
b044cda1
CW
2767@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2768@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2769Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2770[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2771
252b5132
RH
2772@kindex --section-alignment
2773@item --section-alignment
2774Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2775addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2776[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2777
2778@cindex stack size
2779@kindex --stack
2780@item --stack @var{reserve}
2781@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2782Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2783to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2784committed.
bb10df36 2785[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2786
2787@kindex --subsystem
2788@item --subsystem @var{which}
2789@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2790@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2791Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2792legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2793@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2794the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2795@var{which}.
bb10df36 2796[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2797
2f563b51
DK
2798The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2799of the PE file header:
2800[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2801
2d5c3743
NC
2802@kindex --high-entropy-va
2803@item --high-entropy-va
2804Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2805(ASLR).
2806
2f563b51
DK
2807@kindex --dynamicbase
2808@item --dynamicbase
2809The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2810randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2811Vista for i386 PE targets.
2812
2813@kindex --forceinteg
2814@item --forceinteg
2815Code integrity checks are enforced.
2816
2817@kindex --nxcompat
2818@item --nxcompat
2819The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2820This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2821
2822@kindex --no-isolation
2823@item --no-isolation
2824Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2825
2826@kindex --no-seh
2827@item --no-seh
2828The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2829this image.
2830
2831@kindex --no-bind
2832@item --no-bind
2833Do not bind this image.
2834
2835@kindex --wdmdriver
2836@item --wdmdriver
2837The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 2838
2f563b51
DK
2839@kindex --tsaware
2840@item --tsaware
2841The image is Terminal Server aware.
2842
0cb112f7
CF
2843@kindex --insert-timestamp
2844@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
2845@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2846Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2847as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2848other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
56e6cf80 2849will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
eeb14e5a
LZ
2850same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2851can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
56e6cf80 2852that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
eeb14e5a 2853identically.
252b5132
RH
2854@end table
2855
0285c67d
NC
2856@c man end
2857
ac145307
BS
2858@ifset C6X
2859@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2860
2861@c man begin OPTIONS
2862
2863The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2864libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2865all executables use an index of 0.
2866
2867@table @gcctabopt
2868
2869@kindex --dsbt-size
2870@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
56e6cf80 2871This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
ac145307
BS
2872or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2873entries.
2874
2875@kindex --dsbt-index
2876@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2877This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2878to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2879executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2880@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2881
fbd9ad90
PB
2882@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2883The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2884exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2885
ac145307
BS
2886@end table
2887
2888@c man end
2889@end ifset
2890
93fd0973
SC
2891@ifset M68HC11
2892@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2893
2894@c man begin OPTIONS
2895
2896The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2897memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2898
2899@table @gcctabopt
2900
2901@kindex --no-trampoline
2902@item --no-trampoline
2903This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2904is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2905instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2906
2907@kindex --bank-window
2908@item --bank-window @var{name}
2909This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2910the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2911The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2912paging and addresses within the memory window.
2913
2914@end table
2915
2916@c man end
2917@end ifset
2918
7fb9f789
NC
2919@ifset M68K
2920@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2921
2922@c man begin OPTIONS
2923
2924The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2925when linking for 68K targets.
2926
2927@table @gcctabopt
2928
2929@kindex --got
2930@item --got=@var{type}
2931This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2932@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2933@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2934Info entry for @file{ld}.
2935
2936@end table
2937
2938@c man end
2939@end ifset
2940
833794fc
MR
2941@ifset MIPS
2942@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
2943
2944@c man begin OPTIONS
2945
2946The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
2947generation when linking for MIPS targets.
2948
2949@table @gcctabopt
2950
2951@kindex --insn32
2952@item --insn32
2953@kindex --no-insn32
2954@itemx --no-insn32
2955These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
2956generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
2957or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
295832-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
2959used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
2960possible.
2961
2962@end table
2963
2964@c man end
2965@end ifset
2966
252b5132
RH
2967@ifset UsesEnvVars
2968@node Environment
2969@section Environment Variables
2970
0285c67d
NC
2971@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2972
560e09e9 2973You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2974@ifclear SingleFormat
2975@code{GNUTARGET},
2976@end ifclear
2977@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2978
36f63dca 2979@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2980@kindex GNUTARGET
2981@cindex default input format
2982@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2983use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2984of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2985@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2986of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2987attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2988this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2989there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2990object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2991BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2992in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2993@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2994
2995@kindex LDEMULATION
2996@cindex default emulation
2997@cindex emulation, default
2998@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2999@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3000behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3001available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3002the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3003variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3004linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
3005
3006@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3007@cindex demangling, default
3008Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3009@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3010default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3011a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3012may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3013options.
3014
0285c67d
NC
3015@c man end
3016@end ifset
3017
252b5132
RH
3018@node Scripts
3019@chapter Linker Scripts
3020
3021@cindex scripts
3022@cindex linker scripts
3023@cindex command files
3024Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3025written in the linker command language.
3026
3027The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3028the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3029the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3030more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3031direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3032described below.
3033
3034The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3035yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3036linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
3037to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
3038such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3039
3040You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3041line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3042default linker script.
3043
3044You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3045to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3046Linker Scripts}.
3047
3048@menu
3049* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3050* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3051* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3052* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3053* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3054* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3055* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3056* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3057* VERSION:: VERSION Command
3058* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3059* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3060@end menu
3061
3062@node Basic Script Concepts
3063@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3064@cindex linker script concepts
3065We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3066describe the linker script language.
3067
3068The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3069file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3070@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3071The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3072purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3073among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3074section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3075in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3076
3077Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3078also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 3079contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
3080the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3081A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3082area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3083loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3084which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3085of debugging information.
3086
3087Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3088first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3089the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3090@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3091section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3092same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3093is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3094(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3095based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3096RAM address would be the VMA.
3097
3098You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3099program with the @samp{-h} option.
3100
3101Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3102@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3103has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3104information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3105will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3106static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3107referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3108
3109You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3110program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3111option.
3112
3113@node Script Format
3114@section Linker Script Format
3115@cindex linker script format
3116Linker scripts are text files.
3117
3118You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3119either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3120symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3121generally ignored.
3122
3123Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3124If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3125otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3126double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3127file name.
3128
3129You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3130@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3131to whitespace.
3132
3133@node Simple Example
3134@section Simple Linker Script Example
3135@cindex linker script example
3136@cindex example of linker script
3137Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3138
3139The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3140@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3141memory layout of the output file.
3142
3143The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3144describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3145code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3146@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3147Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3148your input files.
3149
3150For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
31510x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3152linker script which will do that:
3153@smallexample
3154SECTIONS
3155@{
3156 . = 0x10000;
3157 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3158 . = 0x8000000;
3159 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3160 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3161@}
3162@end smallexample
3163
3164You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3165followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3166descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3167
252b5132
RH
3168The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3169sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3170counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3171other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3172current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3173incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3174@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3175
3176The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3177required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3178after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3179which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3180wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3181means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3182
3183Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3184@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3185@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3186
3187The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3188the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3189at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3190output section, the value of the location counter will be
3191@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3192effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3193immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3194
3195The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3196alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3197example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3198sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3199may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3200sections.
3201
3202That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3203
3204@node Simple Commands
3205@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3206@cindex linker script simple commands
3207In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3208
3209@menu
3210* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3211* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3212@ifclear SingleFormat
3213* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3214@end ifclear
3215
4a93e180 3216* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3217* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3218@end menu
3219
3220@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3221@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3222@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3223@cindex start of execution
3224@cindex first instruction
3225@cindex entry point
3226The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3227point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3228entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3229@smallexample
3230ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3231@end smallexample
3232
3233There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3234entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3235stopping when one of them succeeds:
3236@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3237@item
252b5132 3238the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3239@item
252b5132 3240the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3241@item
3ab904c4
NC
3242the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3243targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3244check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3245@item
252b5132 3246the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3247@item
252b5132
RH
3248The address @code{0}.
3249@end itemize
3250
3251@node File Commands
36f63dca 3252@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3253@cindex linker script file commands
3254Several linker script commands deal with files.
3255
3256@table @code
3257@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3258@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3259@cindex including a linker script
3260Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3261be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3262with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
326310 levels deep.
3264
4006703d
NS
3265You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3266@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3267
252b5132
RH
3268@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3269@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3270@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3271@cindex input files in linker scripts
3272@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3273@cindex linker script input object files
3274The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3275in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3276
3277For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3278a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3279then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3280
3281In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3282script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3283
e3f2db7f
AO
3284In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3285with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3286located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3287for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3288open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
cad60a33
HPN
3289linker will search through the archive library search path.
3290The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3291as the first character in the filename path. See also the
e3f2db7f 3292description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3293
ff5dcc92 3294If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3295name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3296@samp{-l}.
3297
3298When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3299files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3300script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3301
3302@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3303@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3304@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3305@cindex grouping input files
3306The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3307files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3308new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3309in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3310
b717d30e
JJ
3311@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3312@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3313@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3314This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3315commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3316as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3317with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3318when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3319@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3320and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3321setting afterwards.
3322
252b5132
RH
3323@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3324@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3325@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3326The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3327@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3328@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3329Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3330precedence.
3331
3332You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3333output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3334
3335@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3336@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3337@cindex library search path in linker script
3338@cindex archive search path in linker script
3339@cindex search path in linker script
3340The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3341@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3342@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3343on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3344are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3345the command line option are searched first.
3346
3347@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3348@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3349@cindex first input file
3350The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3351that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3352though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3353when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3354first file.
3355@end table
3356
3357@ifclear SingleFormat
3358@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3359@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3360A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3361
3362@table @code
3363@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3364@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3365@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3366@cindex output file format in linker script
3367The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3368output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3369exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3370(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3371line option takes precedence.
3372
3373You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3374formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3375This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3376desired endianness.
3377
3378If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3379will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3380output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3381used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3382
3383For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3384command:
3385@smallexample
3386OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3387@end smallexample
3388This says that the default format for the output file is
3389@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3390option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3391format.
3392
3393@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3394@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3395@cindex input file format in linker script
3396The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3397files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3398This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3399(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3400is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3401command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3402@end table
3403@end ifclear
3404
4a93e180
NC
3405@node REGION_ALIAS
3406@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3407@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3408@cindex region alias
3409@cindex region names
3410
3411Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3412@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3413
3414@smallexample
3415REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3416@end smallexample
3417
3418The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3419memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3420to memory regions. An example follows.
3421
3422Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3423memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3424that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3425non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3426access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3427read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3428sections:
3429
3430@itemize @bullet
3431@item
3432@code{.text} program code;
3433@item
3434@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3435@item
3436@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3437@item
3438@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3439@end itemize
3440
3441The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3442part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3443output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3444systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3445@code{C}:
3446@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3447@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3448@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3449@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3450@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3451@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3452@end multitable
3453The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3454loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3455the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3456the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3457
3458The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3459includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3460memory layout:
3461@smallexample
3462INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3463
3464SECTIONS
3465 @{
3466 .text :
3467 @{
3468 *(.text)
3469 @} > REGION_TEXT
3470 .rodata :
3471 @{
3472 *(.rodata)
3473 rodata_end = .;
3474 @} > REGION_RODATA
3475 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3476 @{
3477 data_start = .;
3478 *(.data)
3479 @} > REGION_DATA
3480 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3481 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3482 .bss :
3483 @{
3484 *(.bss)
3485 @} > REGION_BSS
3486 @}
3487@end smallexample
3488
3489Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3490regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3491variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3492@table @code
3493@item A
3494Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3495@smallexample
3496MEMORY
3497 @{
3498 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3499 @}
3500
3501REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3502REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3503REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3504REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3505@end smallexample
3506@item B
3507Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3508into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3509@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3510@smallexample
3511MEMORY
3512 @{
3513 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3514 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3515 @}
3516
3517REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3518REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3519REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3520REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3521@end smallexample
3522@item C
3523Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3524@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3525initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3526system start into the @code{RAM}.
3527@smallexample
3528MEMORY
3529 @{
3530 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3531 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3532 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3533 @}
3534
3535REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3536REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3537REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3538REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3539@end smallexample
3540@end table
3541
3542It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3543@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3544necessary:
3545@smallexample
3546#include <string.h>
3547
3548extern char data_start [];
3549extern char data_size [];
3550extern char data_load_start [];
3551
3552void copy_data(void)
3553@{
3554 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3555 @{
3556 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3557 @}
3558@}
3559@end smallexample
3560
252b5132 3561@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3562@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3563There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3564
3565@table @code
3566@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3567@kindex ASSERT
3568@cindex assertion in linker script
3569Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3570with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3571
fd1c4238
NC
3572Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3573take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3574inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3575for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3576symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3577
3578@smallexample
3579 .stack :
3580 @{
3581 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3582 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3583 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3584 @}
3585@end smallexample
3586
3587will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3588PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3589can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3590
3591@smallexample
3592 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3593 .stack :
3594 @{
3595 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3596 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3597 @}
3598@end smallexample
3599
3600will work.
3601
252b5132
RH
3602@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3603@kindex EXTERN
3604@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3605Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3606symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3607modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3608each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3609command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3610
3611@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3612@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3613@cindex common allocation in linker script
3614This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3615to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3616output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3617
4818e05f
AM
3618@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3619@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3620@cindex common allocation in linker script
3621This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3622command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3623to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3624
53d25da6
AM
3625@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3626@kindex INSERT
3627@cindex insert user script into default script
3628This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3629augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3630inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3631@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3632default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3633sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3634linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3635insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3636linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3637default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3638of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3639to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3640is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3641
3642@smallexample
3643SECTIONS
3644@{
3645 OVERLAY :
3646 @{
3647 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3648 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3649 @}
3650@}
3651INSERT AFTER .text;
3652@end smallexample
3653
252b5132
RH
3654@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3655@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3656@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3657This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3658references among certain output sections.
3659
3660In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3661using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3662will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3663errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3664a function defined in the other section.
3665
3666The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3667@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3668an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3669@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3670names.
3671
3672@ifclear SingleFormat
3673@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3674@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3675@cindex machine architecture
3676@cindex architecture
3677Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3678of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3679architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3680the @samp{-f} option.
3681@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3682
3683@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3684@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3685This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3686@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3687in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3688@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3689@end table
3690
3691@node Assignments
3692@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3693@cindex assignment in scripts
3694@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3695@cindex variables, defining
3696You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3697the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3698
3699@menu
3700* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3701* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3702* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3703* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3704* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3705@end menu
3706
3707@node Simple Assignments
3708@subsection Simple Assignments
3709
3710You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3711
3712@table @code
3713@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3714@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3715@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3716@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3717@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3718@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3719@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3720@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3721@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3722@end table
3723
3724The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3725@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3726defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3727
3728The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3729may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3730
3731The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3732
3733Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3734
3735You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3736statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3737section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3738
3739The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3740expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3741
3742Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3743assignments may be used:
3744
3745@smallexample
3746floating_point = 0;
3747SECTIONS
3748@{
3749 .text :
3750 @{
3751 *(.text)
3752 _etext = .;
3753 @}
156e34dd 3754 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3755 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3756@}
3757@end smallexample
3758@noindent
3759In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3760zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3761the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3762defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3763upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3764
eb8476a6
MR
3765@node HIDDEN
3766@subsection HIDDEN
3767@cindex HIDDEN
3768For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3769exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3770
3771Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3772@code{HIDDEN}:
3773
3774@smallexample
3775HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3776SECTIONS
3777@{
3778 .text :
3779 @{
3780 *(.text)
3781 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3782 @}
3783 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3784 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3785@}
3786@end smallexample
3787@noindent
3788In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3789
252b5132
RH
3790@node PROVIDE
3791@subsection PROVIDE
3792@cindex PROVIDE
3793In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3794only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3795the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3796@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3797@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3798@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3799@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3800@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3801
3802Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3803@smallexample
3804SECTIONS
3805@{
3806 .text :
3807 @{
3808 *(.text)
3809 _etext = .;
3810 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3811 @}
3812@}
3813@end smallexample
3814
3815In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3816underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3817the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3818underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3819If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3820linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3821
7af8e998
L
3822@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3823@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3824@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3825Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3826hidden and won't be exported.
3827
73ae6183
NC
3828@node Source Code Reference
3829@subsection Source Code Reference
3830
3831Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3832intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3833a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3834symbol that does not have a value.
3835
3836Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3837transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3838stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3839prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3840mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3841of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3842variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3843linker script variable might be referred to as:
3844
3845@smallexample
3846 extern int foo;
3847@end smallexample
3848
3849But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3850
3851@smallexample
3852 _foo = 1000;
3853@end smallexample
3854
3855In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3856transformation has taken place.
3857
3858When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3859things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3860in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3861second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3862table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3863contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3864value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3865
3866@smallexample
3867 int foo = 1000;
3868@end smallexample
3869
10bf6894 3870creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
3871holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3872number 1000 is initially stored.
3873
3874When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3875first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3876memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3877So:
3878
3879@smallexample
3880 foo = 1;
3881@end smallexample
3882
3883looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3884associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3885address. Whereas:
3886
3887@smallexample
3888 int * a = & foo;
3889@end smallexample
3890
10bf6894 3891looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
3892and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3893the variable @samp{a}.
3894
3895Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3896the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3897an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3898
3899@smallexample
3900 foo = 1000;
3901@end smallexample
3902
3903creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3904the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3905address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3906linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3907access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3908
3909Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3910you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3911use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3912section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3913linker script contains these declarations:
3914
3915@smallexample
3916@group
3917 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
a5e406b5 3918 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
73ae6183
NC
3919 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3920@end group
3921@end smallexample
3922
3923Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3924
3925@smallexample
3926@group
3927 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3928
73ae6183
NC
3929 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3930@end group
3931@end smallexample
3932
3933Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
5707d2ad
NC
3934Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
3935arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
3936
3937@smallexample
3938@group
3939 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
3940
3941 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
3942@end group
3943@end smallexample
3944
3945Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
3946operators.
73ae6183 3947
252b5132 3948@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3949@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3950@kindex SECTIONS
3951The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3952into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3953
3954The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3955@smallexample
3956SECTIONS
3957@{
3958 @var{sections-command}
3959 @var{sections-command}
3960 @dots{}
3961@}
3962@end smallexample
3963
3964Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3965
3966@itemize @bullet
3967@item
3968an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3969@item
3970a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3971@item
3972an output section description
3973@item
3974an overlay description
3975@end itemize
3976
3977The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3978@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3979those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3980understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3981the layout of the output file.
3982
3983Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3984below.
3985
3986If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3987linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3988section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3989input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3990example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3991in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3992
3993@menu
3994* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3995* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3996* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3997* Input Section:: Input section description
3998* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3999* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4000* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4001* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4002* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4003@end menu
4004
4005@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 4006@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
4007The full description of an output section looks like this:
4008@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4009@group
7e7d5768 4010@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 4011 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 4012 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
4013 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4014 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4015 @{
4016 @var{output-section-command}
4017 @var{output-section-command}
4018 @dots{}
abc9061b 4019 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4020@end group
4021@end smallexample
4022
4023Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4024
4025The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4026name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
4027The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4028the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
4029The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4030
4031Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4032
4033@itemize @bullet
4034@item
4035a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4036@item
4037an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4038@item
4039data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4040@item
4041a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4042@end itemize
4043
4044@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 4045@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
4046@cindex name, section
4047@cindex section name
4048The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4049meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4050support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4051must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4052example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4053output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4054names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4055quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4056characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4057commas must be quoted.
4058
4059The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4060Discarding}.
4061
4062@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 4063@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
4064@cindex address, section
4065@cindex section address
4066The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
4067address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4068is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4069
4070If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4071section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4072to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4073alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4074contained within the output section.
4075
4076The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4077
4078@itemize @bullet
4079@item
4080If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4081is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4082in that region.
4083
4084@item
4085If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4086regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4087section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4088be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4089
4090@item
4091If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4092the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4093counter.
4094@end itemize
4095
4096@noindent
4097For example:
4098
252b5132
RH
4099@smallexample
4100.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4101@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4102
252b5132
RH
4103@noindent
4104and
ea5cae92 4105
252b5132
RH
4106@smallexample
4107.text : @{ *(.text) @}
4108@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4109
252b5132
RH
4110@noindent
4111are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4112@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4113counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
4114counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4115input sections.
252b5132
RH
4116
4117The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4118For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4119so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4120do something like this:
4121@smallexample
4122.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4123@end smallexample
4124@noindent
4125This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4126aligned upward to the specified value.
4127
4128Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
4129location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4130sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
4131
4132@node Input Section
36f63dca 4133@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
4134@cindex input sections
4135@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4136The most common output section command is an input section description.
4137
4138The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4139You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4140in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4141map the input files into your memory layout.
4142
4143@menu
4144* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4145* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4146* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4147* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4148* Input Section Example:: Input section example
4149@end menu
4150
4151@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 4152@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
4153@cindex input section basics
4154An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4155by a list of section names in parentheses.
4156
4157The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4158describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4159
4160The most common input section description is to include all input
4161sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4162include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4163@smallexample
4164*(.text)
4165@end smallexample
4166@noindent
18625d54
CM
4167Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
4168of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4169match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4170example:
252b5132 4171@smallexample
b4346c09 4172*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 4173@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
4174will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
4175@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
4176
4177There are two ways to include more than one section:
4178@smallexample
4179*(.text .rdata)
4180*(.text) *(.rdata)
4181@end smallexample
4182@noindent
4183The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4184@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
4185first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4186they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4187@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4188@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4189
4190You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4191You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4192needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4193@smallexample
4194data.o(.data)
4195@end smallexample
4196
ae17ab41
CM
4197To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4198of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4199
4200Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4201
4202@smallexample
4203@group
4204SECTIONS @{
4205 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4206 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4207@}
4208@end group
4209@end smallexample
4210
4211In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4212input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4213@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4214@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4215whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4216
967928e9
AM
4217You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4218matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4219with no whitespace around the colon.
4220
4221@table @samp
4222@item archive:file
4223matches file within archive
4224@item archive:
4225matches the whole archive
4226@item :file
4227matches file but not one in an archive
4228@end table
4229
4230Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4231wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4232single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4233@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4234within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4235also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4236other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4237from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4238command.
4239
252b5132
RH
4240If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4241the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4242commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4243@smallexample
4244data.o
4245@end smallexample
4246
967928e9
AM
4247When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4248and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4249characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4250name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4251did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4252though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4253@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4254the archive search path.
4255
4256@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4257@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4258@cindex input section wildcards
4259@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4260@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4261@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4262In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4263name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4264
4265The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4266pattern for the file name.
4267
4268The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4269
4270@table @samp
4271@item *
4272matches any number of characters
4273@item ?
4274matches any single character
4275@item [@var{chars}]
4276matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4277character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4278@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4279@item \
4280quotes the following character
4281@end table
4282
4283When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4284will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4285Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4286exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4287@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4288a @samp{/} character.
4289
4290File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4291specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4292does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4293
4294If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4295appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4296will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4297sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4298@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4299@smallexample
4300.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4301.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4302@end smallexample
4303
bcaa7b3e 4304@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4305Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4306in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4307this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4308pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4309@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4310into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4311
bcaa7b3e
L
4312@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4313@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4314difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4315descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4316Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4317reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4318
02ecc8e9
L
4319@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4320@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4321difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4322ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4323encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4324
bcaa7b3e
L
4325@cindex SORT
4326@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4327
4328When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4329can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4330
4331@enumerate
4332@item
4333@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4334It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4335sections have the same name.
4336@item
4337@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4338It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4339sections have the same alignment.
4340@item
c0065db7 4341@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4342treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4343@item
4344@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4345is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4346@item
4347All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4348@end enumerate
4349
4350When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4351section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4352takes precedence over the command line option.
4353
4354If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4355command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4356treated as nested sorting command.
4357
4358@enumerate
4359@item
4360@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4361@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4362@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4363@item
4364@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4365@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4366@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4367@end enumerate
4368
4369If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4370command line option will be ignored.
4371
eda680f8
L
4372@cindex SORT_NONE
4373@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4374section sorting option.
4375
252b5132
RH
4376If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4377@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4378precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4379
4380This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4381files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4382sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4383The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4384with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4385linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4386@smallexample
4387@group
4388SECTIONS @{
4389 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4390 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4391 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4392 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4393@}
4394@end group
4395@end smallexample
4396
4397@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4398@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4399@cindex common symbol placement
4400@cindex uninitialized data placement
4401A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4402file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4403linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4404named @samp{COMMON}.
4405
4406You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4407other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4408particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4409input files are placed in another section.
4410
4411In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4412@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4413@smallexample
4414.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4415@end smallexample
4416
4417@cindex scommon section
4418@cindex small common symbols
4419Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4420example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4421symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4422different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4423the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4424symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4425to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4426locations.
4427
4428@cindex [COMMON]
4429You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4430notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4431@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4432
4433@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4434@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4435@cindex KEEP
4436@cindex garbage collection
4437When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4438it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4439This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4440with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4441@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4442
4443@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4444@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4445The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4446to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4447start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4448@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4449follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4450@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4451@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4452All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4453files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4454
4455@smallexample
4456@group
4457SECTIONS @{
4458 outputa 0x10000 :
4459 @{
4460 all.o
4461 foo.o (.input1)
4462 @}
36f63dca
NC
4463@end group
4464@group
252b5132
RH
4465 outputb :
4466 @{
4467 foo.o (.input2)
4468 foo1.o (.input1)
4469 @}
36f63dca
NC
4470@end group
4471@group
252b5132
RH
4472 outputc :
4473 @{
4474 *(.input1)
4475 *(.input2)
4476 @}
4477@}
4478@end group
a1ab1d2a 4479@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4480
4481@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4482@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4483@cindex data
4484@cindex section data
4485@cindex output section data
4486@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4487@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4488@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4489@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4490@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4491You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4492@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4493an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4494parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4495value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4496counter.
4497
4498The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4499store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4500bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4501stored.
4502
4503For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4504of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4505@smallexample
4506BYTE(1)
4507LONG(addr)
4508@end smallexample
4509
4510When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4511same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4512target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4513@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4514@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4515
4516If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4517which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4518When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4519true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4520endianness of the first input object file.
4521
36f63dca 4522Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4523between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4524@smallexample
4525SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4526@end smallexample
4527whereas this will work:
4528@smallexample
4529SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4530@end smallexample
4531
252b5132
RH
4532@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4533@cindex holes, filling
4534@cindex unspecified memory
4535You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4536current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4537otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4538gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4539with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4540necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4541point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4542than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4543different parts of an output section.
4544
4545This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4546value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4547@smallexample
563e308f 4548FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4549@end smallexample
4550
4551The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4552section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4553part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4554entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4555precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4556expression.
252b5132
RH
4557
4558@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4559@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4560There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4561commands.
4562
4563@table @code
4564@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4565@cindex input filename symbols
4566@cindex filename symbols
4567@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4568The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4569The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4570file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4571the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4572
4573This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4574normally used for any other object file format.
4575
4576@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4577@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4578@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4579@item CONSTRUCTORS
4580When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4581unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4582destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4583arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4584automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4585For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4586linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4587@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4588ignored for other object file formats.
4589
4590The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4591constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4592Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4593the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4594first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4595of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4596compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4597formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4598@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4599the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4600destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4601@code{exit}.
4602
4603For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4604arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4605addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4606and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4607linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4608runtime code expects to see.
4609
4610@smallexample
4611 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4612 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4613 *(.ctors)
4614 LONG(0)
4615 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4616 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4617 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4618 *(.dtors)
4619 LONG(0)
4620 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4621@end smallexample
4622
4623If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4624which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4625are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4626are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4627command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4628@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4629@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4630@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4631
4632Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4633and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4634need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4635scripts.
4636
4637@end table
4638
4639@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4640@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4641@cindex discarding sections
4642@cindex sections, discarding
4643@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
4644The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4645This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4646may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4647@smallexample
49c13adb 4648.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4649@end smallexample
4650@noindent
4651will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4652@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4653sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
4654space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4655too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4656space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4657@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4658@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4659This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 4660
a0976ea4 4661The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4662on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4663symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4664the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4665section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4666
4667@cindex /DISCARD/
4668The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4669input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4670section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4671
4672@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4673@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4674@cindex output section attributes
4675We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4676like this:
0c71d759 4677
252b5132 4678@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4679@group
7e7d5768 4680@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4681 [AT(@var{lma})]
4682 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4683 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4684 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4685 @{
4686 @var{output-section-command}
4687 @var{output-section-command}
4688 @dots{}
562d3460 4689 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4690@end group
4691@end smallexample
0c71d759 4692
252b5132
RH
4693We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4694@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4695remaining section attributes.
4696
a1ab1d2a 4697@menu
252b5132
RH
4698* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4699* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4700* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4701* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4702* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4703* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4704* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4705* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4706@end menu
4707
4708@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4709@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4710Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4711parentheses. The following types are defined:
4712
4713@table @code
4714@item NOLOAD
4715The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4716loaded into memory when the program is run.
4717@item DSECT
4718@itemx COPY
4719@itemx INFO
4720@itemx OVERLAY
4721These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4722rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4723marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4724section when the program is run.
4725@end table
4726
4727@kindex NOLOAD
4728@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4729@cindex loading, preventing
4730The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4731the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4732the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4733@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4734need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4735@smallexample
4736@group
4737SECTIONS @{
4738 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4739 @dots{}
4740@}
4741@end group
4742@end smallexample
4743
4744@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4745@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4746@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4747@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4748@cindex load address
4749@cindex section load address
4750Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4751@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4752@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4753specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4754address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4755
ea5cae92
NC
4756The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4757specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4758takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4759load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4760region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4761
4762If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4763section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4764load address:
4765
4766@itemize @bullet
4767@item
4768If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4769the LMA address as well.
4770
4771@item
4772If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4773
4774@item
4775Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4776with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4777section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4778VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4779the last section in the located region.
4780
4781@item
4782If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4783that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4784
4785@item
4786If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4787section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4788@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4789
4790@cindex ROM initialized data
4791@cindex initialized data in ROM
4792This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4793example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4794called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4795@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4796even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4797uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4798defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4799counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4800
4801@smallexample
4802@group
4803SECTIONS
4804 @{
4805 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4806 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4807 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4808 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4809 .bss 0x3000 :
4810 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4811@}
4812@end group
4813@end smallexample
4814
4815The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4816this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4817the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4818how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4819script.
4820
4821@smallexample
4822@group
4823extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4824char *src = &_etext;
4825char *dst = &_data;
4826
ea5cae92
NC
4827/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4828while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 4829 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 4830
ea5cae92 4831/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
4832for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4833 *dst = 0;
4834@end group
4835@end smallexample
4836
bbf115d3
L
4837@node Forced Output Alignment
4838@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4839@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4840@cindex forcing output section alignment
4841@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 4842You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
4843alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
4844intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 4845
7e7d5768
AM
4846@node Forced Input Alignment
4847@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4848@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4849@cindex forcing input section alignment
4850@cindex input section alignment
4851You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4852SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4853sections, whether larger or smaller.
4854
0c71d759
NC
4855@node Output Section Constraint
4856@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4857@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4858@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4859@cindex constraints on output sections
4860You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4861of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4862read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4863@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4864
252b5132 4865@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4866@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4867@kindex >@var{region}
4868@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4869@cindex memory regions and sections
4870You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4871using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4872
4873Here is a simple example:
4874@smallexample
4875@group
4876MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4877SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4878@end group
4879@end smallexample
4880
4881@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4882@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4883@kindex :@var{phdr}
4884@cindex section, assigning to program header
4885@cindex program headers and sections
4886You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4887using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4888one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4889assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4890@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4891linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4892
4893Here is a simple example:
4894@smallexample
4895@group
4896PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4897SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4898@end group
4899@end smallexample
4900
4901@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4902@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4903@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4904@cindex section fill pattern
4905@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4906You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4907@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4908(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4909within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4910alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4911necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4912of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4913an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4914fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4915other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4916pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4917expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4918
4919You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4920output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4921
4922Here is a simple example:
4923@smallexample
4924@group
563e308f 4925SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4926@end group
4927@end smallexample
4928
4929@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4930@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4931@kindex OVERLAY
4932@cindex overlays
4933An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4934are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4935the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4936copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4937required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4938can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4939than another.
4940
4941Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4942@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4943output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4944command is as follows:
4945@smallexample
4946@group
4947OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4948 @{
4949 @var{secname1}
4950 @{
4951 @var{output-section-command}
4952 @var{output-section-command}
4953 @dots{}
4954 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4955 @var{secname2}
4956 @{
4957 @var{output-section-command}
4958 @var{output-section-command}
4959 @dots{}
4960 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4961 @dots{}
abc9061b 4962 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4963@end group
4964@end smallexample
4965
4966Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4967section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4968section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 4969those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
4970except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4971sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4972
abc9061b
CC
4973The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
4974the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4975
252b5132
RH
4976The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4977addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4978memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4979whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4980and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4981and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4982
56dd11f0
NC
4983If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
4984references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
4985the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
4986sense for one section to refer directly to another.
4987@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
4988
4989For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4990provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4991defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4992@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4993the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4994within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4995symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4996
4997At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4998the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4999
5000Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5001@code{SECTIONS} construct.
5002@smallexample
5003@group
5004 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5005 @{
5006 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5007 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5008 @}
5009@end group
5010@end smallexample
5011@noindent
5012This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5013address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5014@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 5015following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
5016@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5017@code{__load_stop_text1}.
5018
5019C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5020like the following.
5021
5022@smallexample
5023@group
5024 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5025 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5026 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5027@end group
5028@end smallexample
5029
5030Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5031everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5032example could have been written identically as follows.
5033
5034@smallexample
5035@group
5036 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5037 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5038 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 5039 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5040 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5041 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
5042 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5043@end group
5044@end smallexample
5045
5046@node MEMORY
36f63dca 5047@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
5048@kindex MEMORY
5049@cindex memory regions
5050@cindex regions of memory
5051@cindex allocating memory
5052@cindex discontinuous memory
5053The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5054memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5055
5056The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5057memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5058may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5059can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5060set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5061regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5062around to fit into the available regions.
5063
127fcdff
AB
5064A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5065however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5066specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5067@code{MEMORY} is:
252b5132
RH
5068@smallexample
5069@group
a1ab1d2a 5070MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5071 @{
5072 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5073 @dots{}
5074 @}
5075@end group
5076@end smallexample
5077
5078The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5079region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5080Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5081with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
5082must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5083add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 5084command.
252b5132
RH
5085
5086@cindex memory region attributes
5087The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5088whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5089not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5090@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5091section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5092the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5093them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5094
5095The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5096@table @samp
5097@item R
5098Read-only section
5099@item W
5100Read/write section
5101@item X
5102Executable section
5103@item A
5104Allocatable section
5105@item I
5106Initialized section
5107@item L
5108Same as @samp{I}
5109@item !
c09e9a8c 5110Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
5111@end table
5112
5113If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5114@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5115attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5116in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5117attributes.
5118
5119@kindex ORIGIN =
5120@kindex o =
5121@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
5122The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5123the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5124cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5125abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5126@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
5127
5128@kindex LENGTH =
5129@kindex len =
5130@kindex l =
5131The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5132region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
5133be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5134@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
5135
5136In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5137available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5138and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5139linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5140is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5141or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5142explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5143region.
5144
5145@smallexample
5146@group
a1ab1d2a 5147MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5148 @{
5149 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5150 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5151 @}
5152@end group
5153@end smallexample
5154
5155Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5156specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5157@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5158a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5159output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5160was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5161the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5162output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5163region, the linker will issue an error message.
5164
3ec57632 5165It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 5166expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
5167@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5168
5169@smallexample
5170@group
c0065db7 5171 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
5172@end group
5173@end smallexample
5174
252b5132
RH
5175@node PHDRS
5176@section PHDRS Command
5177@kindex PHDRS
5178@cindex program headers
5179@cindex ELF program headers
5180@cindex program segments
5181@cindex segments, ELF
5182The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5183@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5184loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5185program with the @samp{-p} option.
5186
5187When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5188reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5189program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5190This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5191interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5192
5193The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5194in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5195precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5196the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5197not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5198
5199The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5200generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5201ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5202
5203This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5204@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5205
5206@smallexample
5207@group
5208PHDRS
5209@{
5210 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5211 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5212@}
5213@end group
5214@end smallexample
5215
5216The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5217of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5218header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5219with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5220must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5221is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5222
5223Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5224system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5225specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5226sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5227attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5228Section Phdr}.
5229
5230It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5231merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5232repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5233contain the section.
5234
5235If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5236then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5237not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5238convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5239placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5240default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5241segment at all.
5242
5243@kindex FILEHDR
5244@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5245You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5246the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5247The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5248file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5249include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5250segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5251these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5252
5253The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5254value of the keyword.
5255
5256@table @asis
5257@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5258Indicates an unused program header.
5259
5260@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5261Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5262the file.
5263
5264@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5265Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5266
5267@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5268Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5269found.
5270
5271@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5272Indicates a segment holding note information.
5273
5274@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5275A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5276ABI.
5277
5278@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5279Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5280
5281@item @var{expression}
5282An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5283be used for types not defined above.
5284@end table
5285
5286You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5287in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5288@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5289Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5290output section attribute.
5291
5292The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5293which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5294explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5295an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5296header.
5297
5298Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5299headers used on a native ELF system.
5300
5301@example
5302@group
5303PHDRS
5304@{
5305 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5306 interp PT_INTERP ;
5307 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5308 data PT_LOAD ;
5309 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5310@}
5311
5312SECTIONS
5313@{
5314 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5315 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5316 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5317 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5318 @dots{}
5319 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5320 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5321 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5322 @dots{}
5323@}
5324@end group
5325@end example
5326
5327@node VERSION
5328@section VERSION Command
5329@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5330@cindex symbol versions
5331@cindex version script
5332@cindex versions of symbols
5333The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5334only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5335symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5336a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5337shared library.
5338
5339You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5340you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5341also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5342
5343The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5344@smallexample
5345VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5346@end smallexample
5347
5348The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5349Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5350version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5351version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5352version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5353scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5354library.
5355
5356The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5357examples.
5358
5359@smallexample
5360VERS_1.1 @{
5361 global:
5362 foo1;
5363 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5364 old*;
5365 original*;
5366 new*;
252b5132
RH
5367@};
5368
5369VERS_1.2 @{
5370 foo2;
5371@} VERS_1.1;
5372
5373VERS_2.0 @{
5374 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5375 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5376 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5377 "f(int, double)";
5378 @};
252b5132
RH
5379@} VERS_1.2;
5380@end smallexample
5381
5382This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5383version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5384The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5385a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5386of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5387symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5388is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5389in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5390However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5391name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5392
5393Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5394depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5395to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5396
5397Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5398depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5399and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5400
5401When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5402specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5403unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5404unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5405somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5406wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5407wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5408set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5409ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5410
5411The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5412they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5413could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5414However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5415
0f6bf451 5416Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5417in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5418symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5419won't.
5420
5421@smallexample
7c9c73be 5422@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5423@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5424
252b5132
RH
5425When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5426symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5427requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5428shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5429loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5430linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5431application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5432way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5433all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5434search for each symbol reference.
5435
5436The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5437doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5438that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5439functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5440the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5441required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5442that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5443versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5444the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5445
5446There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5447first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5448source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5449script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5450maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5451@smallexample
5452__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5453@end smallexample
5454@noindent
5455in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5456be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5457The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5458@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5459takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5460
5461The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5462function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5463an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5464version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5465linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5466
5467To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5468source file. Here is an example:
5469
5470@smallexample
5471__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5472__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5473__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5474__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5475@end smallexample
5476
5477In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5478unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5479example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5480@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5481
5482When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5483some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5484this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5485@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5486declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5487you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5488
5489If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5490within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5491(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5492specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5493
cb840a31
L
5494You can also specify the language in the version script:
5495
5496@smallexample
5497VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5498@end smallexample
5499
c0065db7 5500The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5501The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5502demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5503patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5504@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5505
86043bbb
MM
5506Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5507described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5508or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5509the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5510whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5511cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5512might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5513should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5514expect when you upgrade.
5515
252b5132
RH
5516@node Expressions
5517@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5518@cindex expressions
5519@cindex arithmetic
5520The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5521that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5522expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5523host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5524
5525You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5526
5527The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5528expressions.
5529
5530@menu
5531* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5532* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5533* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5534* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5535* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5536* Operators:: Operators
5537* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5538* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5539* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5540@end menu
5541
5542@node Constants
5543@subsection Constants
5544@cindex integer notation
5545@cindex constants in linker scripts
5546All constants are integers.
5547
5548As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5549octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5550hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5551@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5552@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5553value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5554
5555@cindex scaled integers
5556@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5557@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5558@cindex suffixes for integers
5559@cindex integer suffixes
5560In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5561constant by
5562@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5563@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5564@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5565@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5566@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5567@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5568@tex
5569${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5570@end tex
5571@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5572respectively. For example, the following
5573all refer to the same quantity:
5574
252b5132 5575@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5576_fourk_1 = 4K;
5577_fourk_2 = 4096;
5578_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5579_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5580@end smallexample
5581
8a308ae8
NC
5582Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5583conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5584
0c71d759
NC
5585@node Symbolic Constants
5586@subsection Symbolic Constants
5587@cindex symbolic constants
5588@kindex CONSTANT
5589It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5590the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5591
5592@table @code
5593@item MAXPAGESIZE
5594@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5595The target's maximum page size.
5596
5597@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5598@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5599The target's default page size.
5600@end table
5601
5602So for example:
5603
5604@smallexample
9d5777a3 5605 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5606@end smallexample
5607
5608will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5609supported by the target.
5610
252b5132
RH
5611@node Symbols
5612@subsection Symbol Names
5613@cindex symbol names
5614@cindex names
5615@cindex quoted symbol names
5616@kindex "
5617Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5618and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5619Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5620specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5621keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5622@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5623"SECTION" = 9;
5624"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5625@end smallexample
5626
5627Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5628to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5629whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5630
ecca9871
L
5631@node Orphan Sections
5632@subsection Orphan Sections
5633@cindex orphan
5634Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5635are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5636script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5637output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5638placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5639attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5640same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5641If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5642at the end of the file.
5643
5644For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5645well as section flag.
5646
c005eb9e
AB
5647The command line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5648(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}) can be used to control which
5649output sections an orphan is placed in.
5650
41911f68 5651If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5652the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
9aec8434 5653__start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
41911f68
NC
5654section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5655orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5656representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5657character.
5658
252b5132
RH
5659@node Location Counter
5660@subsection The Location Counter
5661@kindex .
5662@cindex dot
5663@cindex location counter
5664@cindex current output location
5665The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5666current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5667location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5668within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5669anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5670
5671@cindex holes
5672Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5673moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5674location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5675and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5676doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5677
5678@smallexample
5679SECTIONS
5680@{
5681 output :
5682 @{
5683 file1(.text)
5684 . = . + 1000;
5685 file2(.text)
5686 . += 1000;
5687 file3(.text)
563e308f 5688 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5689@}
5690@end smallexample
5691@noindent
5692In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5693located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5694followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5695@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5696@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5697specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5698
5c6bbab8
NC
5699@cindex dot inside sections
5700Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5701current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5702statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5703absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5704however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5705not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5706
5707@smallexample
5708SECTIONS
5709@{
5710 . = 0x100
5711 .text: @{
5712 *(.text)
5713 . = 0x200
5714 @}
5715 . = 0x500
5716 .data: @{
5717 *(.data)
5718 . += 0x600
5719 @}
5720@}
5721@end smallexample
5722
5723The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5724and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5725the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5726much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5727move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5728and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5729the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5730the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5731
b5666f2f
AM
5732@cindex dot outside sections
5733Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5734output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5735needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5736
5737@smallexample
5738SECTIONS
5739@{
5740 start_of_text = . ;
5741 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5742 end_of_text = . ;
5743
5744 start_of_data = . ;
5745 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5746 end_of_data = . ;
5747@}
5748@end smallexample
5749
5750If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5751not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5752between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5753should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5754blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5755the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5756sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5757statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5758special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5759place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5760as follows:
5761
5762@smallexample
5763SECTIONS
5764@{
5765 start_of_text = . ;
5766 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5767 end_of_text = . ;
5768
5769 start_of_data = . ;
5770 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5771 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5772 end_of_data = . ;
5773@}
5774@end smallexample
5775
5776This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5777@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5778placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5779assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5780a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5781section. So you could write:
5782
5783@smallexample
5784SECTIONS
5785@{
5786 start_of_text = . ;
5787 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5788 end_of_text = . ;
5789
5790 . = . ;
5791 start_of_data = . ;
5792 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5793 end_of_data = . ;
5794@}
5795@end smallexample
5796
5797Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5798@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5799
252b5132
RH
5800@need 2000
5801@node Operators
5802@subsection Operators
5803@cindex operators for arithmetic
5804@cindex arithmetic operators
5805@cindex precedence in expressions
5806The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5807the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5808@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5809@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5810@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5811@smallexample
5812precedence associativity Operators Notes
5813(highest)
58141 left ! - ~ (1)
58152 left * / %
58163 left + -
58174 left >> <<
58185 left == != > < <= >=
58196 left &
58207 left |
58218 left &&
58229 left ||
582310 right ? :
582411 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5825(lowest)
5826@end smallexample
5827Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5828(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5829(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5830@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5831@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5832@tex
5833\vskip \baselineskip
5834%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5835\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5836\hrule
5837\halign
5838{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5839height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5840&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5841height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5842\noalign{\hrule}
5843height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5844&highest&&&&&\cr
5845% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5846&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5847&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5848&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5849&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5850&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5851&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5852&7&&left&&|&\cr
5853&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5854&9&&left&&||&\cr
5855&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5856&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5857&lowest&&&&&\cr
5858height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5859\hrule}
5860@end tex
5861@iftex
5862{
5863@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5864@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5865@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5866}
5867@end iftex
5868@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5869
5870@node Evaluation
5871@subsection Evaluation
5872@cindex lazy evaluation
5873@cindex expression evaluation order
5874The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5875an expression when absolutely necessary.
5876
5877The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5878address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5879regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5880as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5881
5882However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5883until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5884other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5885for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5886
5887The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5888assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5889allocation.
5890
5891Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5892@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5893
5894If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5895available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5896following
5897@smallexample
5898@group
5899SECTIONS
5900 @{
a1ab1d2a 5901 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5902 @{ *(.text) @}
5903 @}
5904@end group
5905@end smallexample
5906@noindent
5907will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5908address}.
5909
5910@node Expression Section
5911@subsection The Section of an Expression
5912@cindex expression sections
5913@cindex absolute expressions
5914@cindex relative expressions
5915@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5916@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5917@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
5918Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5919relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5920using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5921value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5922symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5923operations.
5924
abf4be64
AM
5925Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5926section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5927address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5928@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5929functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
5930One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5931(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
5932differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5933versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5934section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5935Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
5936absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5937given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5938everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
5939
5940In the following simple example,
252b5132 5941
7542af2a
AM
5942@smallexample
5943@group
5944SECTIONS
5945 @{
5946 . = 0x100;
5947 __executable_start = 0x100;
5948 .data :
5949 @{
5950 . = 0x10;
5951 __data_start = 0x10;
5952 *(.data)
5953 @}
5954 @dots{}
5955 @}
5956@end group
5957@end smallexample
252b5132 5958
7542af2a
AM
5959both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5960address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5961@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5962section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 5963
5c3049d2
AM
5964For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5965addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
5966
5967@itemize @bullet
5968@item
c05f749e
AM
5969Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
5970operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
5971absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
5972@item
7542af2a
AM
5973Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5974relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5975and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5976@item
c05f749e
AM
5977Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
5978in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
5979address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
5980before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
5981@end itemize
5982
5983The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5984
5985@itemize @bullet
5986@item
5987An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5988@item
5989The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5990@item
9bc8bb33 5991The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 5992relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
9bc8bb33
AM
5993(after above conversions) is also a number.
5994@item
5995The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5996relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5997section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
5998@item
5999The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6000conversions) is an absolute address.
6001@end itemize
252b5132
RH
6002
6003You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6004to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6005create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6006section @samp{.data}:
6007@smallexample
6008SECTIONS
6009 @{
6010 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6011 @}
6012@end smallexample
6013@noindent
6014If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6015@samp{.data} section.
6016
7542af2a
AM
6017Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6018particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6019
252b5132
RH
6020@node Builtin Functions
6021@subsection Builtin Functions
6022@cindex functions in expressions
6023The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6024use in linker script expressions.
6025
6026@table @code
6027@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6028@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6029@cindex expression, absolute
6030Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6031of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6032value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6033normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6034
6035@item ADDR(@var{section})
6036@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6037@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 6038Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 6039script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
6040the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6041@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6042@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6043the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
6044@smallexample
6045@group
6046SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6047 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 6048 @{
252b5132
RH
6049 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6050 @dots{}
6051 @}
6052 .output :
6053 @{
6054 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6055 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6056 @}
6057@dots{} @}
6058@end group
6059@end smallexample
6060
876f4090
NS
6061@item ALIGN(@var{align})
6062@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6063@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6064@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
6065@cindex round up location counter
6066@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
6067@cindex round up expression
6068@cindex align expression
6069Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6070to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6071doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6072arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6073expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
e0a3af22 6074equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
876f4090
NS
6075
6076Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6077next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6078variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6079input sections:
252b5132
RH
6080@smallexample
6081@group
6082SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6083 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6084 *(.data)
6085 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6086 @}
6087@dots{} @}
6088@end group
6089@end smallexample
6090@noindent
6091The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6092a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6093a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6094of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6095
6096The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6097
362c1d1a
NS
6098@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6099@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6100@cindex section alignment
6101Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6102been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6103evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6104the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6105value in that section.
6106@smallexample
6107@group
6108SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6109 .output @{
6110 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6111 @dots{}
6112 @}
6113@dots{} @}
6114@end group
6115@end smallexample
6116
252b5132
RH
6117@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6118@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6119This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6120scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6121section.
6122
2d20f7bf
JJ
6123@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6124@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6125This is equivalent to either
6126@smallexample
6127(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6128@end smallexample
6129or
6130@smallexample
fe6052e1
AM
6131(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6132 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
2d20f7bf
JJ
6133@end smallexample
6134@noindent
6135depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6136for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6137@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6138If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6139memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6140bytes in the on-disk file.
6141
6142This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6143any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6144@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6145be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
6146working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
6147
6148@noindent
6149Example:
6150@smallexample
6151 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6152@end smallexample
6153
6154@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6155@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6156This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6157evaluation purposes.
6158
6159@smallexample
6160 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6161@end smallexample
6162
a4f5ad88
JJ
6163@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6164@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6165This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 6166@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6167When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6168does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6169@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
6170boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
6171it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
6172@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6173padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6174section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6175
6176@smallexample
6177 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6178@end smallexample
6179
252b5132
RH
6180@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6181@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6182@cindex symbol defaults
6183Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
6184defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6185return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
6186default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6187shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6188the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6189existed, its value is preserved:
6190
6191@smallexample
6192@group
6193SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6194 .text : @{
6195 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6196 @dots{}
6197 @}
6198 @dots{}
6199@}
6200@end group
6201@end smallexample
6202
3ec57632
NC
6203@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6204@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6205Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6206
252b5132
RH
6207@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6208@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6209@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6210Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6211Section LMA}).
6212
2e53f7d6
NC
6213@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6214@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6215Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6216@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6217
252b5132
RH
6218@kindex MAX
6219@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6220Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6221
6222@kindex MIN
6223@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6224Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6225
6226@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6227@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6228@cindex unallocated address, next
6229Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6230This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6231use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6232output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6233
3ec57632
NC
6234@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6235@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6236Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6237
ba916c8a
MM
6238@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6239@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6240Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6241value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6242@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6243will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6244can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6245``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6246name.
6247
252b5132
RH
6248@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6249@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6250@cindex section size
6251Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6252been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6253evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6254@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6255@smallexample
6256@group
6257SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6258 .output @{
6259 .start = . ;
6260 @dots{}
6261 .end = . ;
6262 @}
6263 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6264 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6265@dots{} @}
6266@end group
6267@end smallexample
6268
6269@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6270@itemx sizeof_headers
6271@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6272@cindex header size
6273Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6274information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6275this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6276choose, to facilitate paging.
6277
6278@cindex not enough room for program headers
6279@cindex program headers, not enough room
6280When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6281@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6282number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6283addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6284additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6285room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6286the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6287script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6288you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6289command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6290@end table
6291
6292@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6293@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6294@cindex implicit linker scripts
6295If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6296an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6297linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6298linker will report an error.
6299
6300An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6301
6302Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6303assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6304commands.
6305
6306Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6307at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6308read. This can affect archive searching.
6309
6310@ifset GENERIC
6311@node Machine Dependent
6312@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6313
6314@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6315@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6316sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6317functionality are not listed.
6318
6319@menu
36f63dca
NC
6320@ifset H8300
6321* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6322@end ifset
6323@ifset I960
6324* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6325@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6326@ifset M68HC11
6327* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6328@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6329@ifset ARM
6330* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6331@end ifset
6332@ifset HPPA
6333* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6334@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6335@ifset M68K
6336* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6337@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6338@ifset MIPS
6339* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6340@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6341@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6342* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6343@end ifset
2469cfa2 6344@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6345* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6346@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6347@ifset NDS32
6348* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6349@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6350@ifset NIOSII
6351* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6352@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6353@ifset POWERPC
6354* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6355@end ifset
6356@ifset POWERPC64
6357* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6358@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6359@ifset SPU
6360* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6361@end ifset
74459f0e 6362@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6363* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6364@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6365@ifset WIN32
6366* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6367@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6368@ifset XTENSA
6369* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6370@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6371@end menu
6372@end ifset
6373
252b5132
RH
6374@ifset H8300
6375@ifclear GENERIC
6376@raisesections
6377@end ifclear
6378
6379@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6380@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6381
6382@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6383For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6384you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6385
6386@table @emph
6387@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6388@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6389@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6390targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6391program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6392respectively.
6393
6394@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6395@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6396@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6397@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6398sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6399page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6400(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6401@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6402top page of memory).
1502569c 6403
81f5558e
NC
6404@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6405indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6406displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6407the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6408@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6409whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6410range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6411
1502569c 6412@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6413@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6414biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6415which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6416page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6417(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6418@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6419the top page of memory).
6420
6421@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6422@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
642332 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6424changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6425(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6426@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6427the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6428@end table
6429
6430@ifclear GENERIC
6431@lowersections
6432@end ifclear
6433@end ifset
6434
36f63dca 6435@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6436@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6437@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6438@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6439@node Renesas
6440@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6441
c2dcd04e
NC
6442@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6443H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6444options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6445@end ifset
6446@end ifclear
6447
6448@ifset I960
6449@ifclear GENERIC
6450@raisesections
6451@end ifclear
6452
6453@node i960
6454@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6455
6456@cindex i960 support
6457
6458You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6459specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6460family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6461incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6462linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6463libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6464search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6465
6466For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6467well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6468paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6469the names
6470
6471@smallexample
6472@group
6473try
6474libtry.a
6475tryca
6476libtryca.a
6477@end group
6478@end smallexample
6479
6480@noindent
6481The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6482two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6483
6484You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6485the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6486use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6487specifies a library.
6488
6489@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6490@cindex relaxing on i960
6491@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6492you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6493@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6494them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6495instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6496instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6497target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6498not itself call any subroutines).
6499
6500@ifclear GENERIC
6501@lowersections
6502@end ifclear
6503@end ifset
6504
6505@ifset ARM
6506@ifclear GENERIC
6507@raisesections
6508@end ifclear
6509
93fd0973
SC
6510@ifset M68HC11
6511@ifclear GENERIC
6512@raisesections
6513@end ifclear
6514
6515@node M68HC11/68HC12
6516@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6517
6518@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6519
6520@subsection Linker Relaxation
6521
6522For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6523optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6524
6525@table @emph
6526@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6527@item relaxing address modes
6528@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6529targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6530program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6531respectively.
6532
6533@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6534transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6535page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6536
6537@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6538When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6539of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6540addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6541@code{bset} instructions.
6542
6543@end table
6544
6545@subsection Trampoline Generation
6546
6547@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6548@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6549For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6550call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6551will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6552trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6553case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6554point to the function trampoline.
6555
6556@ifclear GENERIC
6557@lowersections
6558@end ifclear
6559@end ifset
6560
36f63dca 6561@node ARM
3674e28a 6562@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6563
6564@cindex ARM interworking support
6565@kindex --support-old-code
6566For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6567between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6568been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6569line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6570libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6571option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6572given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6573which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6574the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6575non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6576
6577@cindex thumb entry point
6578@cindex entry point, thumb
6579@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6580The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6581@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6582But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6583branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6584executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6585
ce11ba6c
KT
6586@cindex PE import table prefixing
6587@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6588The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6589the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6590element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6591import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6592
e489d0ae
PB
6593@cindex BE8
6594@kindex --be8
6595The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
080bb7bb
NC
6596executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6597objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6598option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6599little-endian code.
e489d0ae 6600
3674e28a
PB
6601@cindex TARGET1
6602@kindex --target1-rel
6603@kindex --target1-abs
6604The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6605@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6606or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6607and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6608
6609@cindex TARGET2
6610@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6611The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6612@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6613meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6614@table @samp
6615@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6616@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6617@item abs
6618@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6619@item got-rel
6620@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6621@end table
6622
319850b4
JB
6623@cindex FIX_V4BX
6624@kindex --fix-v4bx
6625The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6626specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6627interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6628also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6629
6630In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6631linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6632@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6633
6634In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6635relocations are ignored.
6636
845b51d6
PB
6637@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6638@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6639Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6640relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6641
6642@smallexample
6643TST rM, #1
6644MOVEQ PC, rM
6645BX Rn
6646@end smallexample
6647
6648This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6649and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6650condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6651
33bfe774
JB
6652@cindex USE_BLX
6653@kindex --use-blx
6654The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6655BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6656situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6657code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6658each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6659
6660This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6661specify it if you are using that target.
6662
c6dd86c6
JB
6663@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6664@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6665The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6666bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6667instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6668to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6669the support code can read the intended values.
6670
6671The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6672intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6673and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6674intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6675full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6676you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6677
6678If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6679enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6680@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6681mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6682vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6683@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6684
6685If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6686potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6687such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6688first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6689instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6690the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6691are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6692
2de70689
MGD
6693@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6694@kindex --fix-arm1176
6695@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6696The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6697in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6698are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6699unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6700
9d5777a3 6701Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6702Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6703http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6704
a504d23a
LA
6705@cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6706@kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6707
6708The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6709workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6710the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6711off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6712the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6713core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6714integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6715VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6716
6717The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6718necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6719
6720The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6721@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6722STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6723linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6724@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6725
6726If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6727potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6728such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
6729replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
6730branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
6731then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
6732
6733The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
6734the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
6735
6736The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
6737they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
6738there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6739occurs.
6740
6741The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
6742PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
6743large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
6744cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6745occurs.
6746
bf21ed78
MS
6747@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6748@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6749The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6750warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6751enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6752linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6753using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6754not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6755
6756@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6757@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6758The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6759warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6760@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6761linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6762using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6763
726150b7
NC
6764@cindex PIC_VENEER
6765@kindex --pic-veneer
6766The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6767ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6768is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6769@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6770
6771@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6772@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6773The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6774code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6775perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6776placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6777controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6778The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 6779duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
6780group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6781code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6782where they should be placed.
6783
6784The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6785@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6786placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6787branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6788placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6789value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6790exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6791A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6792linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6793from the input sections.
6794
6795The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6796@samp{N = +1}.
6797
1a51c1a4
NC
6798Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6799only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6800otherwise.
6801
1db37fe6
YG
6802@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6803@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6804@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6805The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6806
6807The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6808
68fcca92
JW
6809@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
6810@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
6811@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
6812The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
6813
6814Please contact ARM for further details.
6815
1db37fe6
YG
6816@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6817@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6818@cindex Merging exidx entries
6819The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6820
6821@kindex --long-plt
6822@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
6823The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
6824which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
6825entries which only support 512Mb of code.
6826
36f63dca
NC
6827@ifclear GENERIC
6828@lowersections
6829@end ifclear
6830@end ifset
6831
6832@ifset HPPA
6833@ifclear GENERIC
6834@raisesections
6835@end ifclear
6836
6837@node HPPA ELF32
6838@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6839@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6840@kindex --multi-subspace
6841When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6842import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6843The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6844stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6845multiple sub-spaces.
6846
6847@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6848@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6849Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6850stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6851@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6852sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6853a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6854the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6855conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6856prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6857A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6858branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6859@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6860@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6861detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6862positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6863
6864Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6865single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6866create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6867large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6868
6869@ifclear GENERIC
6870@lowersections
6871@end ifclear
6872@end ifset
6873
7fb9f789
NC
6874@ifset M68K
6875@ifclear GENERIC
6876@raisesections
6877@end ifclear
6878
6879@node M68K
6880@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6881
6882@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6883@kindex --got=@var{type}
6884The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6885The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6886@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6887the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6888@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6889entries only at non-negative offsets.
6890@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6891entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6892support such GOTs.
6893@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6894output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6895file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6896files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6897
6898@ifclear GENERIC
6899@lowersections
6900@end ifclear
6901@end ifset
6902
833794fc
MR
6903@ifset MIPS
6904@ifclear GENERIC
6905@raisesections
6906@end ifclear
6907
6908@node MIPS
6909@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6910
6911@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
6912@kindex --insn32
6913@kindex --no-insn32
6914The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
6915microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
6916in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
6917used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
6918or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
6919including 16-bit ones where possible.
6920
6921@ifclear GENERIC
6922@lowersections
6923@end ifclear
6924@end ifset
6925
36f63dca
NC
6926@ifset MMIX
6927@ifclear GENERIC
6928@raisesections
6929@end ifclear
6930
6931@node MMIX
6932@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6933For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6934@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6935understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6936can translate between the two formats.
6937
6938There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6939Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6940registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6941equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6942@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6943global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6944this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6945symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6946
7a2de473
HPN
6947Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6948@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6949The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6950of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6951
6952Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6953are left out from an mmo file.
6954
6955@ifclear GENERIC
6956@lowersections
6957@end ifclear
6958@end ifset
6959
6960@ifset MSP430
6961@ifclear GENERIC
6962@raisesections
6963@end ifclear
6964
6965@node MSP430
6966@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6967For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6968will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6969just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6970
6971@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6972The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6973
6974@table @code
6975@item @samp{.vectors}
6976Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6977
6978@item @samp{.bootloader}
6979Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6980in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6981
6982@item @samp{.infomem}
6983Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6984this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6985
c0065db7 6986@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6987This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6988in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6989
6990@item @samp{.noinit}
6991Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6992
c0065db7 6993The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6994@end table
6995
6996@ifclear GENERIC
6997@lowersections
6998@end ifclear
6999@end ifset
7000
35c08157
KLC
7001@ifset NDS32
7002@ifclear GENERIC
7003@raisesections
7004@end ifclear
7005
7006@node NDS32
7007@section @code{ld} and NDS32
7008@kindex relaxing on NDS32
7009For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7010relaxes objects according to these options.
7011
7012@table @code
7013@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7014Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7015
7016@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7017Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7018
7019@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7020Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7021
7022@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7023Export the EX9 table after linking.
7024
7025@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7026Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7027
7028@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7029Update the existing EX9 table.
7030
7031@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7032Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7033
7034@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7035Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7036
7037@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7038Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7039
7040@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7041Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7042@end table
7043
7044@ifclear GENERIC
7045@lowersections
7046@end ifclear
7047@end ifset
7048
78058a5e
SL
7049@ifset NIOSII
7050@ifclear GENERIC
7051@raisesections
7052@end ifclear
7053
7054@node Nios II
7055@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7056@cindex Nios II call relaxation
7057@kindex --relax on Nios II
7058
7059Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7060transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7061which may result in @command{ld} giving
7062@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7063The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7064trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7065outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7066trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7067be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7068larger than 256MB.
7069
7070The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7071is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7072@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7073locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7074source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7075register as a temporary.
7076
7077Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7078relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7079option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7080
7081@ifclear GENERIC
7082@lowersections
7083@end ifclear
7084@end ifset
7085
2a60a7a8
AM
7086@ifset POWERPC
7087@ifclear GENERIC
7088@raisesections
7089@end ifclear
7090
7091@node PowerPC ELF32
7092@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7093@cindex PowerPC long branches
7094@kindex --relax on PowerPC
7095Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7096displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7097@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7098@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7099the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7100section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
7101section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7102@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7103both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7104considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
7105
7106@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7107@table @option
7108@cindex PowerPC PLT
7109@kindex --bss-plt
7110@item --bss-plt
7111Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7112generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7113the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7114writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7115@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7116PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7117compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7118BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7119
016687f8
AM
7120@kindex --secure-plt
7121@item --secure-plt
7122@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7123@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7124when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7125layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7126style BSS PLT.
7127
2a60a7a8
AM
7128@cindex PowerPC GOT
7129@kindex --sdata-got
7130@item --sdata-got
7131The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7132sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7133@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7134section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7135@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7136@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7137@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7138@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7139PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7140pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7141GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7142really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7143
7144@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7145@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7146@item --emit-stub-syms
7147This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7148symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7149
7150@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7151@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7152@item --no-tls-optimize
7153PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7154sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7155disable the optimization.
7156@end table
7157
7158@ifclear GENERIC
7159@lowersections
7160@end ifclear
7161@end ifset
7162
7163@ifset POWERPC64
7164@ifclear GENERIC
7165@raisesections
7166@end ifclear
7167
7168@node PowerPC64 ELF64
7169@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7170
7171@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7172@table @option
7173@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7174@kindex --stub-group-size
7175@item --stub-group-size
7176Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7177by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7178@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7179sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7180a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7181the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7182conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7183prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7184A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7185branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7186@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7187@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7188detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7189positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7190
7191Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7192single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7193create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7194large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7195
7196@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7197@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7198@item --emit-stub-syms
7199This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7200symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7201
7202@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7203@kindex --dotsyms
7204@kindex --no-dotsyms
95421fb9
AM
7205@item --dotsyms
7206@itemx --no-dotsyms
2a60a7a8
AM
7207These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7208in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7209function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7210code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7211properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7212to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7213@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7214dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7215feature.
7216
7ae4ea7d
AM
7217@cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7218@kindex --save-restore-funcs
7219@kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
95421fb9
AM
7220@item --save-restore-funcs
7221@itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7ae4ea7d
AM
7222These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7223provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7224@samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7225function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7226link.
7227
2a60a7a8
AM
7228@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7229@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7230@item --no-tls-optimize
7231PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7232sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7233disable the optimization.
7234
7c9cf415
AM
7235@cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7236@kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7237@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
95421fb9
AM
7238@item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7239@itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7c9cf415
AM
7240These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7241stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7242an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7243@code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7244stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7245option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7246Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7247slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7248application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7249normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7250
2a60a7a8
AM
7251@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7252@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7253@item --no-opd-optimize
7254PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7255corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 7256the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
7257Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7258
7259@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7260@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7261@item --non-overlapping-opd
7262Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7263@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7264the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7265entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7266
7267@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7268@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7269@item --no-toc-optimize
7270PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7271entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7272reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7273marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7274marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7275relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7276unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7277reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7278discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7279reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7280code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7281optimization.
7282
7283@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7284@kindex --no-multi-toc
7285@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7286If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7287@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7288where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7289entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7290total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7291grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7292TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7293calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7294help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
729564K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7296Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7297
7298@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7299@kindex --no-toc-sort
7300@item --no-toc-sort
7301By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7302happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7303placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7304with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7305referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7306@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7307results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7308off this feature.
7309
7310@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7311@kindex --plt-align
7312@kindex --no-plt-align
7313@item --plt-align
7314@itemx --no-plt-align
7315Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
e05fa0ba
AM
7316padded so that they don't cross a 32-byte boundary, or to the
7317specified power of two boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. Note
7318that this isn't alignment in the usual sense. By default PLT call
7319stubs are packed tightly.
794e51c0
AM
7320
7321@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7322@kindex --plt-static-chain
7323@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7324@item --plt-static-chain
7325@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7326Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7327chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7328chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7329
7330@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7331@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7332@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7333@item --plt-thread-safe
7334@itemx --no-thread-safe
7335With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7336lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7337another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7338order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7339memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7340barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7341looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7342seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7343default behaviour.
2a60a7a8
AM
7344@end table
7345
7346@ifclear GENERIC
7347@lowersections
7348@end ifclear
7349@end ifset
7350
49fa1e15
AM
7351@ifset SPU
7352@ifclear GENERIC
7353@raisesections
7354@end ifclear
7355
7356@node SPU ELF
7357@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7358
7359@cindex SPU ELF options
7360@table @option
7361
7362@cindex SPU plugins
7363@kindex --plugin
7364@item --plugin
7365This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7366
7367@cindex SPU overlays
7368@kindex --no-overlays
7369@item --no-overlays
7370Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7371regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7372@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7373turns off all this special overlay handling.
7374
7375@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7376@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7377@item --emit-stub-syms
7378This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7379symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7380
7381@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7382@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7383@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7384This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7385function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7386on calls to non-overlay regions.
7387
7388@cindex SPU local store size
7389@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7390@item --local-store=lo:hi
7391@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7392the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7393range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7394
c0065db7 7395@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7396@kindex --stack-analysis
7397@item --stack-analysis
7398SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7399unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7400under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7401@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7402@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7403determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7404for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7405for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7406for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7407find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7408and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7409under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7410dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7411is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7412and calls will be given.
7413
c0065db7 7414@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7415@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7416@item --emit-stack-syms
7417This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7418in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7419These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7420functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7421functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7422such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7423The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7424@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7425@end table
7426
7427@ifclear GENERIC
7428@lowersections
7429@end ifclear
7430@end ifset
7431
36f63dca
NC
7432@ifset TICOFF
7433@ifclear GENERIC
7434@raisesections
7435@end ifclear
7436
7437@node TI COFF
7438@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7439@cindex TI COFF versions
7440@kindex --format=@var{version}
7441The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7442TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7443also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7444format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7445header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7446
7447@ifclear GENERIC
7448@lowersections
7449@end ifclear
7450@end ifset
7451
2ca22b03
NC
7452@ifset WIN32
7453@ifclear GENERIC
7454@raisesections
7455@end ifclear
7456
7457@node WIN32
7458@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7459
c0065db7 7460This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 7461See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 7462command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7463
7464@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7465@cindex import libraries
7466@item import libraries
69da35b5 7467The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7468libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7469regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7470archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
7471support for creating such libraries provided with the
7472@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7473
c0065db7
RM
7474@item exporting DLL symbols
7475@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7476The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7477
7478@table @emph
7479@item using auto-export functionality
7480@cindex using auto-export functionality
7481By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7482which is controlled by the following command line options:
7483
0a5d968e
NC
7484@itemize
7485@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7486@item --exclude-symbols
7487@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7488@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7489@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7490@end itemize
7491
09e2aba4
DK
7492When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7493(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7494symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7495often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7496private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7497options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7498exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7499final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7500
7501If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7502command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7503if either of the following are true:
7504
7505@itemize
7506@item A DEF file is used.
7507@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7508@end itemize
dc8465bf 7509
c0065db7
RM
7510@item using a DEF file
7511@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7512Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7513an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7514exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7515name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7516command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7517
7518@example
7519gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7520@end example
7521
0a5d968e
NC
7522Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7523@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7524
dc8465bf
NC
7525Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7526
7527@example
4b5bd4e7 7528LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7529
7530EXPORTS
7531foo
7532bar
7533_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7534another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7535var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7536doo = foo == foo2
7537eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7538@end example
dc8465bf 7539
7fcab871 7540This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7541symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7542alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7543by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7544@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7545@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7546export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7547in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7548symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7549
6b31ad16
DS
7550The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7551name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7552the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7553
b45619c0
NC
7554When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7555library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7556@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7557executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7558
7559With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7560specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7561non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7562
7563If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7564or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7565filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7566
4b5bd4e7
DS
7567The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7568
7569@example
7570EXPORTS
7571 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7572 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7573 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7574@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7575
7576Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7577@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7578@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7579@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7580Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7581@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7582string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7583
7584The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7585
7586@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7587will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7588by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7589linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7590library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7591
7592@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7593The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7594the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7595@code{*_imp__foo}).
7596
7597@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7598well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7599read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7600variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7601the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7602extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7603application will behave unexpectedly.
7604
7605@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7606it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7607symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7608API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7609the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7610
4b5bd4e7
DS
7611See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7612other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7613
7614@cindex creating a DEF file
7615While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7616with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7617
7618@item Using decorations
7619@cindex Using decorations
7620Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7621itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7622declared as:
7623
7624@example
7625__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7626__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7627@end example
7628
7629All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7630any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7631this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7632the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7633
7634Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7635decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7636instead:
7637
7638@example
7639__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7640__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7641@end example
7642
c0065db7
RM
7643This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7644when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7645variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7646code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7647of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7648omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7649@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7650information.
c0065db7 7651@end table
dc8465bf 7652
2ca22b03
NC
7653@cindex automatic data imports
7654@item automatic data imports
7655The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7656by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7657compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7658issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7659code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7660c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7661initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7662decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7663platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7664command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7665The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7666suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7667trigger the feature's use.
7668
c0065db7 7669auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7670additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7671
c0065db7 7672"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7673documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7674
c0065db7
RM
7675The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7676occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7677One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7678below.
7679
7680@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7681For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7682object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7683offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7684field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7685in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7686without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7687The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7688references.
7689
c0065db7
RM
7690The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7691be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7692themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7693runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7694compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7695support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7696run without error on an older system.
7697
c0065db7
RM
7698@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7699enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7700
7701@cindex direct linking to a dll
7702@item direct linking to a dll
7703The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7704including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7705libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7706traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7707libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7708function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7709though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7710storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7711tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7712large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7713
c0065db7 7714Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7715@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7716of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7717perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7718select the dll instead of an import library.
7719
2ca22b03 7720
69da35b5
NC
7721For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7722to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7723
7724@example
45e948fe
NC
7725libxxx.dll.a
7726xxx.dll.a
7727libxxx.a
7728xxx.lib
69da35b5 7729cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7730libxxx.dll
7731xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7732@end example
7733
69da35b5
NC
7734before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7735
c0065db7
RM
7736(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7737where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7738@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7739file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7740@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7741
c0065db7
RM
7742Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7743@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7744was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7745various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7746could coexist on the same machine.
7747
2ca22b03
NC
7748The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7749applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7750libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7751
7752@example
7753bin/
7754 cygxxx.dll
7755lib/
7756 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7757 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7758@end example
7759
c0065db7
RM
7760Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7761done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7762
77631. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7764@example
7765gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7766@end example
2ca22b03 7767
69da35b5
NC
7768However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7769(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7770@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7771not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7772
2ca22b03
NC
77732. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7774directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7775should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7776making the app/dll.
7777
7778@example
7779ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7780@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7781
7782Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7783
7784@example
7785gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7786@end example
69da35b5
NC
7787
7788This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7789perfectly legal
7790
7791@example
7792bin/
7793 cygxxx-5.dll
7794lib/
c0065db7 7795 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
7796@end example
7797
dc8465bf 7798Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
7799even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7800@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7801
7802Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 7803wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
7804
78051. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7806work with auto-imported data.
7807
dc8465bf
NC
78082. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7809import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7810symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7811for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7812possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 7813
45e948fe
NC
78143. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7815critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7816in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7817stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7818
69da35b5 7819So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
7820true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7821a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7822binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
7823massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7824requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7825will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 7826
c0065db7 7827@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 7828@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7829@item adding additional names
7830Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
7831A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7832exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7833when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 7834import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 7835
c0065db7 7836@example
dc8465bf
NC
7837LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7838
7839EXPORTS
c0065db7 7840foo
dc8465bf 7841_foo = foo
c0065db7 7842@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7843
7844The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7845
7846Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7847source code using the "weak" attribute:
7848
c0065db7
RM
7849@example
7850void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 7851void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 7852@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7853
7854See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7855symbols.
7856
7857@item renaming symbols
7858Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 7859kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
7860@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7861DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 7862created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 7863
c0065db7 7864@example
dc8465bf
NC
7865LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7866
7867EXPORTS
7868_foo = foo
c0065db7 7869@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7870
7871The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7872@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 7873@end table
dc8465bf 7874
0a5d968e 7875Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 7876unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 7877If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
7878@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7879that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7880@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7881renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7882to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7883the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7884In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 7885which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
7886
7887@cindex weak externals
7888@item weak externals
7889The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7890weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7891defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7892are three variants of weak externals:
7893@itemize
7894@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7895called lazy externals.
7896@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7897This form is not presently implemented.
7898@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7899implemented.
7900@end itemize
7901As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7902are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7903uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
7904
7905@cindex aligned common symbols
7906@item aligned common symbols
7907As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7908desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7909the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7910carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7911by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7912tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7913but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7914warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 7915
2ca22b03
NC
7916@end table
7917
7918@ifclear GENERIC
7919@lowersections
7920@end ifclear
7921@end ifset
7922
e0001a05
NC
7923@ifset XTENSA
7924@ifclear GENERIC
7925@raisesections
7926@end ifclear
7927
7928@node Xtensa
7929@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7930
7931@cindex Xtensa processors
7932The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7933@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7934specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7935keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7936example, with the command:
7937
7938@smallexample
7939SECTIONS
7940@{
7941 .text : @{
7942 *(.literal .text)
7943 @}
7944@}
7945@end smallexample
7946
7947@noindent
7948@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7949and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7950literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7951interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7952group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7953files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7954and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 7955
43cd72b9 7956@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 7957@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
7958Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7959provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7960is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7961literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7962will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7963location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7964the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7965unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7966@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7967range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7968
7969For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7970to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7971instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7972instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7973instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7974@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7975hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7976By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7977switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7978density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7979instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7980performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7981linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7982a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7983
7984The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7985control the linker:
7986
7987@cindex Xtensa options
7988@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
7989@item --size-opt
7990When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7991more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7992no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7993alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7994preserve the correctness of the code.
7995@end table
e0001a05
NC
7996
7997@ifclear GENERIC
7998@lowersections
7999@end ifclear
8000@end ifset
8001
252b5132
RH
8002@ifclear SingleFormat
8003@node BFD
8004@chapter BFD
8005
8006@cindex back end
8007@cindex object file management
8008@cindex object formats available
8009@kindex objdump -i
8010The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8011These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8012object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8013format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8014it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8015associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8016object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8017(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8018list all the formats available for your configuration.
8019
8020@cindex BFD requirements
8021@cindex requirements for BFD
8022As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8023several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8024BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8025formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8026been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8027BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8028may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8029
8030One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8031mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8032useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8033conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8034
8035@menu
8036* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8037@end menu
8038
8039@node BFD outline
36f63dca 8040@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
8041@cindex opening object files
8042@include bfdsumm.texi
8043@end ifclear
8044
8045@node Reporting Bugs
8046@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
8047@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8048@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 8049
ff5dcc92 8050Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
8051
8052Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8053it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 8054to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 8055work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 8056@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8057
8058In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8059information that enables us to fix the bug.
8060
8061@menu
8062* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8063* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8064@end menu
8065
8066@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 8067@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
8068@cindex bug criteria
8069
8070If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8071
8072@itemize @bullet
8073@cindex fatal signal
8074@cindex linker crash
8075@cindex crash of linker
8076@item
8077If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 8078@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
8079
8080@cindex error on valid input
8081@item
ff5dcc92 8082If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
8083
8084@cindex invalid input
8085@item
ff5dcc92 8086If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
8087may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8088object files are correct.
8089
8090@item
8091If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 8092improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
8093@end itemize
8094
8095@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 8096@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 8097@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 8098@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
8099
8100A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 8101products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
8102recommend you contact that organization first.
8103
8104You can find contact information for many support companies and
8105individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8106distribution.
8107
ad22bfe8 8108@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 8109Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
8110@value{BUGURL}.
8111@end ifset
252b5132
RH
8112
8113The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8114@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8115fact or leave it out, state it!
8116
8117Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8118problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
8119assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8120matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8121the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8122location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8123were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8124into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8125specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 8126and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
8127
8128Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8129the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8130on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
8131
8132Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
8133bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8134respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8135You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
8136
8137To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8138
8139@itemize @bullet
8140@item
ff5dcc92 8141The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
8142the @samp{--version} argument.
8143
8144Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 8145the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8146
8147@item
ff5dcc92 8148Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
8149patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8150
8151@item
8152The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8153version number.
8154
8155@item
ff5dcc92 8156What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
8157``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8158
8159@item
8160The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8161observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8162list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8163sufficient.
8164
8165If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8166and then we might not encounter the bug.
8167
8168@item
8169A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
8170bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8171provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8172bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8173state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8174requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8175we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8176attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
8177
8178If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8179@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8180object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8181@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8182how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8183
8184@item
8185A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8186incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8187
ff5dcc92 8188Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
8189will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8190not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8191a chance to make a mistake.
8192
8193Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8194say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 8195copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
8196C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8197and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8198fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8199you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8200any conclusion from our observations.
8201
8202@item
ff5dcc92 8203If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
8204diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8205@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 8206If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
8207context, not by line number.
8208
8209The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8210sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8211@end itemize
8212
8213Here are some things that are not necessary:
8214
8215@itemize @bullet
8216@item
8217A description of the envelope of the bug.
8218
8219Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8220which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8221changes will not affect it.
8222
8223This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8224will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8225with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8226We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8227
8228Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8229of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8230output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8231less time, and so on.
8232
8233However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8234report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8235
8236@item
8237A patch for the bug.
8238
8239A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8240the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8241a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8242to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8243
ff5dcc92 8244Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
8245construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8246through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8247able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8248fixed.
8249
8250And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8251patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8252help us to understand.
8253
8254@item
8255A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8256
8257Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8258things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8259@end itemize
8260
8261@node MRI
8262@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8263@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
8264To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8265linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
8266alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8267described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8268simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 8269@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
8270linker commands; these commands are described here.
8271
8272In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8273file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8274features to make use of them.
8275
8276You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8277@samp{-c} command-line option.
8278
8279Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8280command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8281blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8282MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8283issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8284
8285Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8286
8287You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8288lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8289The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8290
8291@table @code
8292@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8293@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8294@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8295Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8296the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8297@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8298your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8299script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8300commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8301input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8302@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8303
8304@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8305@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8306Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8307in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8308
8309@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8310
8311@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8312@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8313Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8314@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8315
8316@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8317@item BASE @var{expression}
8318Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8319absolute addresses) in the output file.
8320
8321@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8322@item CHIP @var{expression}
8323@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8324This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8325
8326@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8327@item END
8328This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8329
8330@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8331@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8332Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 8333language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
8334
8335@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 8336@item
252b5132
RH
8337S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8338
8339@item
8340IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8341
8342@item
8343COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8344@samp{COFF}
8345@end enumerate
8346
8347@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8348@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8349Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8350@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8351
8352The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8353same line, with no change in its effect.
8354
8355@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8356@item LOAD @var{filename}
8357@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8358Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8359same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8360command line.
8361
8362@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8363@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8364@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8365MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8366option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8367
8368@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8369@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8370@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8371Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8372order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8373script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8374sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8375file, in the order specified.
8376
8377@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8378@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8379@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8380@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8381Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8382@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8383
8384@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8385@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8386@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8387@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8388You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8389specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8390If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8391@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8392@end table
8393
793c5807
NC
8394@node GNU Free Documentation License
8395@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8396@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8397
370b66a1
CD
8398@node LD Index
8399@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8400
8401@printindex cp
8402
8403@tex
7ca01ed9 8404% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8405% meantime:
8406\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8407\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8408\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8409\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8410\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8411\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8412\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8413\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8414\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8415% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8416@end tex
8417
252b5132 8418@bye